RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description (V100R005C00 - 04)

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00
IDU Hardware Description

Issue Date 04 2010-10-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 620 iManager U2000 Version V100R005C00 V100R002C00
Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are: l l l l l l Network planning engineer Hardware installation engineer Installation and commissioning engineer Field maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following: l l Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 620
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made to previous issues.
Updates in Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

This document is the fourth release of the V100R005C00 version. Compared with the third release, the updated contents are as follows: Update A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards Description The descriptions of indicators are modified.

This document is the third release of the V100R005C00 version. Compared with the second release, the updated contents are as follows: Update 5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable Description The IDU protection ground cable connection table is added.
iv
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
About This Document

This document is the second release of the V100R005C00 version. Compared with the first release, the updated contents are as follows: Update 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable Description The wire color of the auxiliary interface cable is added.

This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Introduction to the Product......................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Positioning.......................................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-4
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis.....................................................................................................................2-2 2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Board Configuration........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.3 IF1A/IF1B.......................................................................................................................................................3-6 3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-8 3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-12 3.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-15 3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-15 3.3.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-17 3.4 IFX................................................................................................................................................................3-18 3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-19 3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-19 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-21 3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-24 3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-27 3.4.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-27 3.4.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-29 3.5 IF0A/IF0B.....................................................................................................................................................3-30 3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-31 3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-31 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-32 Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-34 3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-37 3.5.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-37 3.5.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-39
3.6 IFH2..............................................................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-42 3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-46 3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-49 3.6.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-50 3.6.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-53 3.7 SL4................................................................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-57 3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-59 3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-61 3.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-61 3.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-61 3.7.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-62 3.8 SL1/SD1........................................................................................................................................................3-63 3.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-63 3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-63 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-65 3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-67 3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-69 3.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-70 3.8.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-70 3.8.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-71 3.9 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-72 3.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-72 3.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-72 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-74 3.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-76 3.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-78 3.9.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-78 3.9.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-79 3.10 PL3..............................................................................................................................................................3-80 3.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-80 3.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-80 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-81 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Contents
3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-83 3.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-84 3.10.6 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-85 3.10.7 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-85 3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................................................................................................................3-86 3.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-86 3.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-87 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-87 3.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-89 3.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-94 3.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-95 3.11.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-95 3.11.8 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-96 3.12 EFT4............................................................................................................................................................3-96 3.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-97 3.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-97 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-98 3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-100 3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-102 3.12.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-103 3.12.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-105 3.13 EMS6.........................................................................................................................................................3-106 3.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-106 3.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-107 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-110 3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-112 3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-116 3.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-117 3.13.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-117 3.13.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-121 3.14 EFP6..........................................................................................................................................................3-123 3.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-123 3.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-123 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-126 3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-128 3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-131 3.14.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-132 3.14.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-135 3.15 PXC...........................................................................................................................................................3-136 3.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-137 3.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-137 3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-138 Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description 3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-140 3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-142 3.15.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-142 3.15.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-143
3.16 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................3-144 3.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-144 3.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-145 3.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-146 3.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-147 3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card................................................................................................................3-154 3.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-156 3.16.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-156 3.16.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-158 3.17 Fan Tray Assembly...................................................................................................................................3-159 3.17.1 Composition.....................................................................................................................................3-160 3.17.2 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-160 3.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-161 3.17.4 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-161 3.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-161 3.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-162
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-6 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-7
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2 Protection Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel..........................................................................................5-5 5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.6 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................5-14 5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable......................................................................................................................5-15 5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable.....................................................................5-17 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable..............................................................................................................................5-18 5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable.......................................................................................................................5-21 5.10 Serial Port Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-23 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Contents
5.11 Orderwire Line............................................................................................................................................5-24 5.12 Network Cable.............................................................................................................................................5-25
A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1 B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1

B.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................B-2 B.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................B-11 B.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................B-16 B.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................B-22 B.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................B-30
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
xi
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620..................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620...............................................1-3 Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products.........1-3 Figure 1-4 IDU 620..............................................................................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-5 Direct mounting .................................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 1-6 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels..........................................................................................................2-5 Figure 3-1 Board appearance................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Board bar code....................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration........................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle..........................................................................3-9 Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel...............................................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel................................................................................................................................3-13 Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle...................................................................................3-21 Figure 3-9 IFX front panel.................................................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-27 Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle......................................................................3-32 Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel.............................................................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel..............................................................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620..........................................................................................3-37 Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave..........................3-42 Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle...............................................................................3-43 Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-46 Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view.............................................................................................................................3-47 Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620...................................................................................................3-49 Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle.................................................................................3-57 Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-59 Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-61 Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle.........................................................................3-65 Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-67 Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Figures
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-67
Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620.............................................................................................3-69 Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle........................................................................3-74 Figure 3-28 SLE front panel...............................................................................................................................3-76 Figure 3-29 SDE front panel..............................................................................................................................3-76 Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-78 Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle.................................................................................3-81 Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-83 Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-84 Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle................................................................3-87 Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-89 Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-89 Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90 Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)........................................................................3-91 Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).......................................................................3-92 Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)............................................................................3-93 Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620.................................................................................... 3-95 Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle...............................................................................3-99 Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel...........................................................................................................................3-100 Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-101 Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-102 Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle............................................................................3-110 Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel..........................................................................................................................3-112 Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-114 Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620................................................................................................3-116 Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6............................................................................................3-127 Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6................................................................................................................3-128 Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-130 Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-131 Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC............................................................................................................3-138 Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture....................................................................................................3-139 Figure 3-56 PXC front panel............................................................................................................................3-140 Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620..................................................................................................3-142 Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC............................................................................................................3-146 Figure 3-59 SCC front panel............................................................................................................................3-148 Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-150 Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface........................................................................3-151 Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces......................................................3-152 Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface...............................................................................3-152 Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card....................................................................................3-154 Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620....................................................................................................3-156 Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame...............................................3-158 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Figures
Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition....................................................................................................3-160 Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board....................................................................................................3-161 Figure 3-69 FAN front panel............................................................................................................................3-162 Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620...............................................................................3-163 Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 PDU front panel..................................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle....................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode...............................................................................4-7 Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode.................................................................................4-8 Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable.....................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel.....................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper........................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)............................................................................5-11 Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable.......................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable............................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable...........................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable...................................5-18 Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable........................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable....................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable......................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire.......................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable.........................................................................................................5-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
xv
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620........................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620.............................................................................1-5 Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620..........................................................................1-6 Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3 Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620..............................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B......................................................3-9 Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B...................................................3-11 Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................3-13 Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description........................................................................................................3-14 Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B.........................................................................................3-15 Table 3-7 Radio work modes..............................................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-8 IF performance...................................................................................................................................3-17 Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...................................................................3-18 Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B...........................................................................3-18 Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX..............................................................3-22 Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX............................................................3-24 Table 3-13 IFX indicator description.................................................................................................................3-25 Table 3-14 IFX interface description..................................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX..................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-16 Radio work mode.............................................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-17 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-29 Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-30 Table 3-19 XPIC performance...........................................................................................................................3-30 Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX.......................................................................................3-30 Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B..................................................3-33 Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B.................................................3-34 Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description......................................................................................................3-35 Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description......................................................................................................3-36 Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B.......................................................................................3-37 Table 3-26 Radio work modes............................................................................................................................3-38 Table 3-27 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-39 Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-39 Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B...........................................................................3-40 Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Tables
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2............................................................3-43 Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2..........................................................3-45 Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description...............................................................................................................3-46 Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description................................................................................................................3-47 Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..............................................................3-48 Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.........................................................3-48 Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description........................................................................................3-49 Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2................................................................................................3-50 Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames...........................................................3-50 Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-53 Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-54 Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..............................................................................3-54 Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2.....................................................................................3-54 Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4..............................................................3-58 Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4............................................................3-59 Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-60 Table 3-46 SL4 interface description.................................................................................................................3-60 Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4.........................................................................................................3-61 Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-62 Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4...............................................................3-63 Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1.....................................................3-66 Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1....................................................3-67 Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description.........................................................................................................3-68 Table 3-53 SL1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-54 SD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1..........................................................................................3-70 Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1.................................................................................................3-70 Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-71 Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1.......................................................3-72 Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE....................................................3-74 Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE...................................................3-75 Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description........................................................................................................3-77 Table 3-62 SLE interface description.................................................................................................................3-77 Table 3-63 SDE interface description................................................................................................................3-77 Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE.........................................................................................3-78 Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance..........................................................................................3-79 Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE......................................................3-79 Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3..............................................................3-81 Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3............................................................3-82 Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-83 Table 3-70 PL3 interface description.................................................................................................................3-84 Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3..................................................................................................3-84
xviii
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Tables
Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance............................................................................................................3-85 Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3...............................................................3-85 Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1............................................................................... 3-86 Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................3-88 Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1...........................................3-88 Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description................................................................................................3-90 Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-90 Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-80 PH1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-81 PD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1).........................................................................3-92 Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).........................................................................3-92 Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)................................................................. 3-93 Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)..............................................................................3-93 Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.................................................................................3-95 Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1.........................................................................................3-95 Table 3-88 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-96 Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1......................................................3-96 Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.....................................................3-97 Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4...........................................................3-99 Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4.......................................................3-100 Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description.............................................................................................................3-101 Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description.............................................................................................................3-101 Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces.........................................................................................3-102 Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description.................................................................................................3-102 Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4..............................................................................................3-103 Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance.....................................................................................3-105 Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4..........................................................3-106 Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B...............................................3-107 Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6......................................................3-111 Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6....................................................3-111 Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description..........................................................................................................3-112 Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description..........................................................................................................3-114 Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-115 Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-115 Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-116 Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6...........................................................................................3-117 Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6..................................................................................................3-117 Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance................................................................................................3-121 Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..........................................................................3-122 Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-122 Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6.......................................................3-123 Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Tables
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6.......................................................3-127 Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6......................................................3-128 Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6.........................................................................................3-129 Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6....................................................................................3-130 Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-130 Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-131 Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-131 Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D.......................................................................................................3-132 Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-136 Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6.........................................................3-136 Table 3-124 PXC indicator description............................................................................................................3-140 Table 3-125 PXC interface description............................................................................................................3-141 Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC.............................................................................................3-142 Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance..........................................................................3-143 Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance.......................................................................................3-143 Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC..........................................................3-144 Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions.................................................................................3-145 Table 3-131 SCC indicator description............................................................................................................3-148 Table 3-132 SCC interface description............................................................................................................3-149 Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-150 Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface.......................................................................3-151 Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description.........................................................................................3-151 Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface.............................................................3-152 Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers.......................................................................................................................3-155 Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-158 Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-158 Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-159 Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC..........................................................3-159 Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA........................................................................3-160 Table 3-143 FAN indicator description............................................................................................................3-162 Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3 Table 4-3 PDU interface description....................................................................................................................4-5 Table 5-1 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections............................................................................................5-4 Table 5-3 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable).................................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)...............................................................................5-12 Table 5-6 120-ohm E1 cable connections..........................................................................................................5-13 Table 5-7 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl....................................................................................5-15 Table 5-8 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections.................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)..........................................................................................5-19
xx
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Tables
Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)........................................................................................5-20 Table 5-11 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)........................................................................................ 5-21 Table 5-12 External alarm transit cable connections..........................................................................................5-22 Table 5-13 Serial port cable connections........................................................................................................... 5-24 Table 5-14 Orderwire wire connections.............................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI.............................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI-X.........................................................................................................5-26 Table 5-17 Cable connection of the straight through cable................................................................................5-27 Table 5-18 Cable connection of the crossover cable..........................................................................................5-27 Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................A-1 Table A-2 IFX indicator description....................................................................................................................A-2 Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description........................................................................................................A-3 Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description..................................................................................................................A-5 Table A-5 SL4 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-6 Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description...........................................................................................................A-6 Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description..........................................................................................................A-7 Table A-8 PL3 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-8 Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description..................................................................................................A-8 Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description...............................................................................................................A-9 Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description..............................................................................................................A-9 Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6...........................................................................................A-11 Table A-13 PXC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-12 Table A-14 SCC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-13 Table A-15 FAN indicator description..............................................................................................................A-14 Table A-16 Weight of Boards............................................................................................................................A-14
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
xxi
1 Introduction to the Product
1
About This Chapter
Introduction to the Product
This chapter provides basic information on the OptiX RTN 620 and the IDU 620 in terms of product application and equipment type. 1.1 Positioning The OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or private networks. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
1-1
1.1 Positioning
The OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or private networks. The OptiX RTN 620 provides several types of service interfaces, and features flexible configuration and easy installation. In addition, the OptiX RTN 620 can provide a TDM microwave and Hybrid microwave integrated solution according to the network requirements, and supports the hybrid networking of microwave and optical fibers. l TDM radio transmission solution In the TDM radio transmission solution, the OptiX RTN 620 transmits TDM services at the E1, E3, and STM-1 levels, and Ethernet services in the manner of Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH. Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620
E1 E1 E1
E1
FE STM-1/ E1 STM-1/ E1 Regional Backhaul Network BSC
E1 FE FE E1
FE/ GE RNC
OptiX RTN 620
MSTP
BTS
NodeB
BSC
RNC
Hybrid radio transmission solution The OptiX RTN 620 supports an upgrade from the TDM radio transmission solution to the Hybrid radio transmission solution, and can transmit the Native E1 service and Native Ethernet service.
1-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620
FE FE E1 E1
E1 E1 STM-1/E1 E1 Regional Backhaul Network FE/GE GE
E1 FE E1 FE
OptiX RTN 620
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
Radio and optical fiber hybrid networking solution The OptiX RTN 620 can be networked with other OptiX transmission products. Thus, it can provide an optical transmission and radio transmission seamlessly integrated solution to transmit SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services. Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products
STM-4 ring
SDH/PDH/ Ethernet
STM-1 ring
SDH/PDH/ Ethernet
OptiX RTN 620
MSTP
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
1-3
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.
IDU 620
The IDU 620 is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It accesses services, performs multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and communication function. Table 1-1 provides the brief introduction to the IDU 620 . Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620 Item Chassis height Pluggable Service interfaces Ethernet processing capability Performance 2U Supported E1, E3, STM-1o, STM-1e, STM-4, FE, GE l Supports the VLAN and QinQ. l Supports the transparent transmission, supports EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN. l Supports QoS (including CAR, CoS, and shaping) functions, traffic classification based on VLAN ID, IEEE 802.1p, and DSCP, eight priority queues, and SP + WRR queue scheduling. l Supports Ethernet OAM based on IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. l Supports the LAG. l Supports the LPT. l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) protection. l Supports the Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH. l Supports synchronous Ethernet. Number of microwave directions RF configuration mode 1 to 4 l 1+0 non-protection configuration l N+0 non-protection configuration (N4) l 1+1 protection configuration l N+1 protection configuration (N = 2 or N = 3) l XPIC configuration
1-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)

NOTE
The Hybrid microwave and the PDH microwave do not support the N+1 protection configuration and the XPIC configuration.
Figure 1-4 IDU 620
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It performs frequency conversion and amplification of signals. The OptiX RTN 620 provide a complete ODU solution, and support an entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz. OptiX RTN 620 supports the RTN 600 ODUand RTN XMC ODU. The OptiX RTN 620 supports three series ODU: standard power, high power, and low capacity for PDH to meet the requirements of different scenarios.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620 Item Description Standard Power ODU ODU type Frequency band SP and SPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU) 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU) High Power ODU HP 7/8/10/10.5/11/13/15 /18/23/26/28/32/38 GHz) Low Capacity for PDH ODU LP and LPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (LP ODU) 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/32/38 GHz (LPA ODU)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
1-5
Item
Description Standard Power ODU High Power ODU QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM Low Capacity for PDH ODU QPSK/16QAM
Microwave modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP ODU) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA ODU)
Channel spacing
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28/40/56 MHz (7/8/10/11/13/15/18/ 23/26/28/32/38 GHz frequency band) 7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz frequency band)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620 Item Description High Power ODU ODU type Frequency band Microwave modulation mode Channel spacing XMC-2 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/56 MHz (7/13/15/18/23 GHz frequency band) 7/14/28/40/56 MHz (8 GHz frequency band) Low Capacity for PDH ODU XMC-1 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 620 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and singlepolarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
1-6
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-5 shows the direct mounting. Figure 1-5 Direct mounting
The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or a largediameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-6 shows the separate mounting. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted to enable two ODUs to share one feed boom. Figure 1-6 Separate mounting
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
1-7
2 Chassis
2
About This Chapter
The IDU 620 is a 2U chassis with four layers and houses pluggable boards. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes. 2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis The IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.
Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.
2.4 IDU Labels Labels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labels and perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury and damage to the equipment.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
2-1
2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling. The and Figure 2-1 show the chassis structures of the IDU 620 respectively. Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes. The IIDU 620 can be installed as follows: l l l l l l l In a 300 mm ETSI cabinet In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet In an open cabinet On a wall On a desk
2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis

The IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes. The three groups of installation holes are used for the following three installation modes: l l Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinet Installing the IDU chassis in an open rack When you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the open rack or the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
2 Chassis
l l
Installing the IDU chassis on the wall Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes
Installation holes for the open rack
Installation holes for the cabinet
Installation holes for wall-mouting
2.4 IDU Labels

Labels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labels and perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury and damage to the equipment.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label
OptiX RTN 620
POWER RATING: -48 -60V ; 10A
Label Name Product nameplate label
Indication The product name and certification
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N14036
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
2-3
2 Chassis
Label
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Label Name Certificate of qualification label
Indication The equipment is qualified.
HUAWEI
MADE IN CHINA
FAN
IU7(IF) IU5(IF) IU3(PXC) IU1(PXC)
IU8(IF) IU6(IF) IU4(EXT)(TPS) IU2(SCC)
Board layout label
The boards that can be installed in each slot
ESD protection label
The equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
ESD
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
Laser safety class label
The power class of the laser source
Grounding label on the chassis body Grounding label on the mounting ear
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
The grounding position in the chassis body
The grounding position in the mounting ear The air filter should be cleaned periodically. The fan blades should not be touched when the fan is rotating.
Periodic cleaning label Fan warning label
DON'T TOUCH THE FANLEAVESBEFORE THEYSLOW DOWN !
High temperature warning label
The board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed.
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
Operation warning label
2-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name Operation guidance label
Indication The switch lever must be pulled outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE There may be no operation guidance label on the equipment that were delivered previously.
PULL
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards by using the IDU 620 as an example. The actual positions of the labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels
OptiX RTN 620
POWER RATING: -48 -60V ; 10A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N14036
FAN
IU7(IF) IU5(IF) IU3(PXC) IU1(PXC)
IU8(IF) IU6(IF) IU4(EXT)(TPS) IU2(SCC)
MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
/QUALIFICATION CARD
PULL
HUAWEI
MADE IN CHINA
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
DON'T TOUCH THE FANLEAVESBEFORE THEYSLOW DOWN !
ESD
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
2-5
3 Boards
3
About This Chapter
The boards of each type are as follows: l l l l l l l IF board: IF1A/IF1B, IFX, IF0A/IF0B, IFH2 SDH board: SL4, SL1, SD1, SLE, SDE PDH board: PL3, PO1, PH1, PD1 Ethernet board: EFT4, EMS6, EFP6 Integrated power cross-connect clock board: PXC System control and communication board: SCC Fan board: FAN
Boards
The IDU 620 support the following types of boards: IF board, SDH board, PDH board, Ethernet board, integrated power cross-connect clock board, system control and communication board, and fan board.
3.1 Board Appearance The board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height). 3.2 Board Configuration The IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types of boards. 3.3 IF1A/IF1B The IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board. 3.4 IFX The IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board. 3.5 IF0A/IF0B The IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board. 3.6 IFH2 The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board. 3.7 SL4 The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1
3 Boards
3.8 SL1/SD1 The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.9 SLE/SDE The SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-port electrical STM-1 board. 3.10 PL3 The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board. 3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1 The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1 tributary board. 3.12 EFT4 The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board. 3.13 EMS6 The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board. 3.14 EFP6 The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board. 3.15 PXC The PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board. 3.16 SCC The SCC is a system control and communication board. 3.17 Fan Tray Assembly The IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.
3-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance

The board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height). Figure 3-1 Board appearance
On the front panel of the board, there are two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used to insert and remove the boards. The captive screws are used to fasten the board. The bar code of the board is attached to one of the two ejector levers.In the case of the EMS6 board, a label indicating the MAC address is affixed on one ejector lever of the board. Figure 3-2 Board bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL61SD101

NOTE
Inner code Board version Board name Board feature code
The board feature code of an optical interface board is used to indicate the type of the optical interface on the board. The board feature code of an E1 interface board is used to indicate the impedance of the interface on the board. For a detailed description of the board feature code, refer to the description of each board in the document.
3.2 Board Configuration

The IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types of boards.
3 Boards
Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration

EXT/IF FAN
Slot 20
Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1
EXT/IF EXT/IF EXT SCC
EXT/IF PXC PXC
NOTE
EXT refers to the extended slot for a service board. IF refers to the slot for an IF board.
Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620 Board Name PXC Full Name Integrated power crossconnect clock board Valid Slot Slot 1/3 Description Accesses one input of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Provides a full timeslot crossconnection for VC-12/VC-3/ VC-4 services equivalent to 16x16 VC-4. Supports the input and output of one external clock signal. SCC System control and communication board Slot 2 Integrates an EOW subboard, occupying the logical slot 21. Provides the NM interface, external alarm interface, synchronous/asynchronous data interface, and orderwire interface. IF1A IF1B IF0A IF0B SDH intermediate frequency board PDH intermediate frequency board Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. The IF1A and IF1B boards support the TU-based and STM-1 based microwave frame formats for establishing microwave links between two sets of IDU 620. The IF0A and IF0B boards support the E1-based microwave frame format for establishing microwave links with the IDU 605 1D/2D.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Slot 5/6/7/8
3-4
3 Boards
Board Name IFX
Full Name XPIC intermediate frequency board
Valid Slot Slot 5/6/7/8
Description Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. Provides the XPIC function. Provides the STM-1 based microwave frame structure.
IFH2
Hybrid intermediate frequency board
Slot 5/6/7/8
l Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. l Provides one FE/GE electrical interface for accessing Ethernet services. l Supports the AM function.
SL4
SDH single-port STM-4 board SDH single-port STM-1 board SDH dual-port STM-1 board SDH single-port STM-1 electrical board SDH dual-port STM-1 electrical board 3xE3/T3 tributary board 8xE1 tributary board 16xE1 tributary board 32xE1 tributary board
Slot 6/8
Uses the SFP optical module to provide one STM-4 optical interface. Uses the SFP optical module to provide one STM-1 optical interface. Uses the SFP optical module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces. Provides one 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface. Provides two 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interfaces.
SL1
Slot 4/5/6/7/8
SD1
SLE SDE PL3 PO1 PH1 PD1
Slot 4/5/6/7/8
Provides three 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interfaces. Provides eight 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides 16 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides 32 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-5
3 Boards
Board Name EFT4
Full Name 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission processing board
Valid Slot Slot 4/5/6/7/8
Description Provides a 4x10/100BASE-T(X) interface for processing Ethernet transparent transmission services. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the board is 2xVC-4. Provides four FE electrical interfaces. The other two ports use SFP optical/electrical modules for providing two GE optical/electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface. Supports the transparently transmitted Ethernet services and Layer 2 switching services. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the board is 2xVC-4.
EMS6
4-port RJ-45 + 2-port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board
EFP6
6-port RJ-45 Fast Ethernet EoPDH switching processing board
Slot 4/5/6/7/8
Provides six FE electrical interfaces. Provides the EoPDH processing function. Supports the transparently transmitted Ethernet services and Layer 2 switching services. The uplink bandwidth of the board is 63xE1.
FAN
Fan board
Slot 20
Provides wind cooling for the IDU 620.
3.3 IF1A/IF1B
The IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board. 3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61. 3.3.2 Functions and Features The IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle of the IF1A/IF1B.
3 Boards
3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.3.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The wayside service attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply to both PDH and SDH microwaves. 3.3.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.
3.3.2 Functions and Features

The IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
IF Processing
l l l l l Maps PDH service signals and SDH service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l l l l l l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.
Pointer Processing
l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-7
3 Boards
Processes the TU pointer in PDH microwave signals.
Protection Processing
l l l l l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE
l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Alarms and Performance Events

l l l Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports inloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.
3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle of the IF1A/IF1B.
3-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Principle Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired boards PXC
IF
Combiner interface unit
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/ DEMUX unit
Logic processing unit
SCC
SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal. l Demodulates the ODU control signal. l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. l Filters the signal. l Performs A/D conversion. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-9
3 Boards
Proced ure 5
Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit.
3-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Proced ure
Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the TU pointer. l Maps the TU-12s into the specified position in the VC-4.
l Processes the clock signal. l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-11
3 Boards
Proced ure 2
Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)
Processing Flow l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets the AU pointer. l Sets multiplex section overheads. l Sets regenerator section overheads. l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing) MODEM unit
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal. l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads. l Performs scrambling. l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.
IF processing unit
l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation.
5 6
SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit
Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel
IF1A
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
3-12
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
IF1A
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel

IF1B
IF
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold.
3-13
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
IF1B
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).
Interfaces
Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Type of connector TNC Cable IF Jumper -
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
l l
3-14

NOTE
3 Boards
There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.
3.3.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620
EXT IF1A/IF1B FAN
Slot 20
EXT IF1A/IF1B EXT IF1A/IF1B EXT SCC
EXT IF1A/IF1B PXC PXC
Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6
3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The wayside service attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply to both PDH and SDH microwaves.
Radio Work Mode

The IF board can operate in the following seven radio work modes. Table 3-7 Radio work modes Service Capacity 4xE1 4xE1 8xE1 8xE1 16xE1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK
Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5)

3-15
3 Boards
Service Capacity 16xE1 22xE1 26xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1 E3 E3 STM-1
Modulation Scheme 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM QPSK 16QAM 128QAM
Channel Spacing (MHz) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5)
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
Radio Link ID
The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuously sends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constant connection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarm is reported on the corresponding IF port.
Wayside Service Attributes

When the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported by radio. The following are the two parameters of wayside services: l 2M wayside Enable Status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default, the 2M wayside service is disabled. l 2M wayside input board This parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.
ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC: l ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.
3 Boards
ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.
ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.
l l
ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE
ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.
J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows: l l l l Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode
By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.
3.3.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF performance
Table 3-8 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350 Performance
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-17
3 Boards
Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Performance 140 50
ASK 5.5 10
Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH signals Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Supported
Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption

Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B Item Description IF1A Dimensions Weight Power consumption IF1B
203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 420 g < 12.2 W 400 g
3.4 IFX
The IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board. 3.4.1 Version Description
3 Boards
The functional version of the IFX is SL61. 3.4.2 Functions and Features The IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode. 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of the IFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/ IF1B. 3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.4.5 Valid Slots The IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.4.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1 byte. 3.4.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IFX is SL61.

The IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.
IF Processing
l l l l l l Maps VC-4 service signals into SDH microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes SDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates SDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies. Cancels the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal in the XPIC mode.
NOTE
When the XPIC function and the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) function are used, the transmission capacity doubles under the same channel conditions.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-19
3 Boards
Overhead Processing
l l l l l Processes the overheads. Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
NOTE
Pointer Processing
Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.
l l l l l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE
For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

NOTE
l l l l l
3-20
Supports inloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE
3 Boards
l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IMaintenance Guide. l When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

This section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of the IFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/ IF1B.

Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC XPIC Paired boards 1+1HSB/FD/SD Paired boards PXC Logic proces sing unit
IF
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/ DEMUX unit
SCC
SCC Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Power unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal
Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus XPIC signal
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-21
3 Boards

Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal. l Demodulates the ODU control signal. l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. l Filters the signal and splits the signal into two channels. Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal. l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the paired IFX and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF signal from the paired IFX as a reference signal. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.
3-22
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Proced ure 5
Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit
Processing Flow l Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit.
NOTE
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-23
3 Boards

Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC board. 2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets the AU pointer. l Sets multiplex section overheads. l Sets regenerator section overheads. l Performs scrambling. 3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. 5 6 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC board. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

3.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3-24
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-9 IFX front panel
IFX
IF
STAT SRV XPIC LINK ODU RMT ACT
IN
OUT
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-13 IFX indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off XPIC On (green) On (red) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms.
3-25
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
IFX
XPIC
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator
Status On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms
Meaning The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-14 IFX interface description Interface IF XPIC IN OUT ODU-PWRa Description IF port XPIC input signal XPIC output signal ODU power switch Type of connector TNC SMA Cable IF Jumper XPIC cable
NOTE
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE
l l
3.4.5 Valid Slots

The IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620
EXT IFX FAN
Slot 20
EXT IFX EXT IFX EXT SCC
EXT IFX PXC PXC
Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1 byte.
Radio Work Mode

The IFX supports only one radio work mode. Table 3-16 Radio work mode Service Capacity STM-1 Modulation Scheme 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-27
3 Boards
NOTE
l 27.5 MHz is the channel spacing of the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment. The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.
Radio Link ID
Wayside Service Attributes

When the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported on radio. The following are the two parameters of wayside services: l 2M wayside Enable Status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default, the 2M wayside service is disabled. l 2M wayside input board This parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.
ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC: l ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled. l ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter. l ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter. l l ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE
3-28
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
XPIC Attributes
The XPIC enabled parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. l When the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX splits the received IF signal, outputs one signal to the XPIC OUT port, and performs XPIC by using the reference IF signal from the XPIC IN port. When the XPIC function is disabled, the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port must be looped back by using an XPIC cable.
J1 Byte
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF performance
Table 3-17 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-29
3 Boards
Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding Supported
XPIC Performance
Table 3-19 XPIC performance Item Cross polarization improvement factor (XPIF) Description 19 dB

Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 450 g < 14.5 W
3.5 IF0A/IF0B
The IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board. 3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61. 3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.
3 Boards
3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.5.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes. 3.5.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61.

The IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
IF Processing
l l l l l Multiplexes 2xE1/5xE1/10xE1/16xE1 service signals into PDH microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes PDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates PDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
l l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
NOTE
l For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
NOTE
l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.

Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired boards PXC
IF
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/ DEMUX unit
SCC
SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal
3-32
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal. l Demodulates the ODU control signal. l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. l Filters the signal. l Performs A/D conversion. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital modulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms. 5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Maps the E1 signal in the PDH microwave frame into the specified position in the VC-4. 6 Logic processing unit l Processes the clock signal. l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC board.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-33
3 Boards
NOTE

Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. 2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. l Sets PDH microwave frame overheads. l Performs scrambling. 3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. 5 6 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC board. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3-34
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel
IF0A
IF
PULL
Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel

IF0B
IF
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
IF0B
ODU-PWR
IF0A
ODU-PWR
3-35
3 Boards
Indicator
Status On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms
Meaning The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
BER
On (yellow) Off
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Type of connector TNC Cable IF Jumper -
NOTE
3-36
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Labels
NOTE
l l
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620
EXT IF0A/IF0B FAN
Slot 20
EXT IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B EXT EXT SCC
IF0A/IF0B EXT PXC PXC
Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.
Radio Work Mode

The IF0A/IF0B can operate in the following four radio work modes.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-37
3 Boards
Table 3-26 Radio work modes Service Capacity 2xE1 5xE1 10xE1 16xE1 Modulation Scheme QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK Channel Spacing (MHz) 3.5 7 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5)
NOTE
l 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are the channel spacings of the 18 GHz frequency band. l The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment. The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported. l The 2xE1 work mode does not support 1+1 protection.
Radio Link ID
ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC: l ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled. l ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter. l ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter. l l ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.

NOTE
3 Boards
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF performance
Table 3-27 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance

Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding Supported
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-39
3 Boards

Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 520 g < 13.7 W
3.6 IFH2
The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board. 3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFH2 is SL61. 3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDH microwave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services. 3.6.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.6.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.6.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters. 3.6.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

The IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission
3 Boards
of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
IF Processing
l l l l l l l Supports the Hybrid microwave frame and supports the pure transmission of the E1 or Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of the E1 and Ethernet signals. Supports the adaptive modulation (AM). Maps service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Ethernet Service Processing

The front panel of the IFH2 has a GE electrical interface. The GE electrical interface supports the following port functions: l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length of 1966 bytes. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
l l
The GE electrical interface also supports the following Ethernet QoS functions: l l Supports the flow classification function that complies with IEEE 802.1p. Schedules the queues of four priority levels in the strict-priority (SP) mode.
Overhead Processing
l l Processes the overheads of the microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
l l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
NOTE
When the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured in the Hybrid microwave, the two IFH2 boards must work with one EMS6 board. As shown in Figure 3-15, the GE ports of the main and standby IFH2 boards are connected to two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 boards through network cables. The two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 board must be configured as a Link Aggregation Group. For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-41
3 Boards
Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave
Network cable To the external equipment Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 4
IFH2 FAN
Slot 20
Slot 7 Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1
EMS6
IFH2 PXC PXC
SCC
Slot 2
IDU 620

NOTE
l l l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports the PRBS bit error test at the IF port. Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDH microwave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.
3 Boards

Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired board Logic processing unit PXC
IF
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/ DEMUX unit
SCC
GE
Ethernet processing unit
SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Ethernet service signal Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal

Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal. l Demodulates the ODU control signal. l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. l Filters the signal. l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-43
3 Boards
Proced ure 4
Functional Module MODEM unit
Processing Flow l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Detects the hybrid microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Verifies the check code in the hybrid microwave frame and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the Link ID in the hybrid microwave frame and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the ATPC message in the hybrid microwave frame and the changes in the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the SCC through the control bus. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM byte, and DCC bytes from the hybrid microwave frame to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Maps the E1 signal in the hybrid microwave frame into the specified position in the VC-4 and sends the VC-4 signal to the logic processing unit. l Sends the Ethernet service signal in the hybrid microwave frame to the Ethernet processing unit.
Ethernet processing unit
Classifies Ethernet service packets into four queues that have different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p. Schedules the services in strict-priority (SP) mode and sends the services through the Ethernet interface.
NOTE
3-44
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Ethernet processing unit l Performs Ethernet performance counting for the accessed FE/GE signal. l Classifies the packets into four queues that have different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p and schedules the services in SP mode. l Sends the Ethernet signals to the MUX/DEMUX unit. 2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. l Sets hybrid microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. 5 6 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-45
3 Boards
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel
IFH2
IF
PULL
GE
Indicators
Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received.
3-46
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
IFH2
ODU-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator BER
Status On (yellow) Off
Meaning The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa GE Description IF port ODU power switch GE electrical port Type of connector TNC RJ-45 Cable IF Jumper Network cable
NOTE
The GE port of the IFH2 supports the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-18 and refer to Table 3-34 and Table 3-35. Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view
87654321
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-47
3 Boards
Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXFunction Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDAFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3-48
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
7 8
Reserved Reserved
The GE port has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-36. Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
Labels
NOTE
l l
3.6.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620
EXT IFH2 FAN
Slot 20
EXT IFH2 EXT IFH2 EXT SCC
EXT IFH2 PXC PXC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-49
3 Boards
Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > Slot 7 > Slot 8 > Slot 6

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.
Radio Work Mode

Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames Channel Spacing (MHz)a, b 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 10 20 25 32 38 44 20 42 51 66 78 90 42 84 105 133 158 Maximum Number of E1s in servicec 5 10 12 15 18 21 10 20 24 31 37 43 20 40 50 64 75
3-50
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Channel Spacing (MHz)a, b 28 (27.5) 56 56 56 56 56 56 40d
Modulation Scheme 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 64QAM
Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 183 84 168 208 265 313 363 -
Maximum Number of E1s in servicec 75 40 75 75 75 75 75 75
NOTE
l a: The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. l b: The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. l c: The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 service capacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can be used for the Ethernet services. l d: This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.
Radio Link ID
ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC: l ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled. l ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter. l ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.
3 Boards
l l
ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE
AM Attributes
The AM is a technology used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme based on the quality of channels. The AM attributes include the following parameters: l AM Enable Status This parameter determines whether the board enables the AM function to perform adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable. l IF Channel Bandwidth This parameter determines the channel spacing used in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to 7 MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz. l Modulation mode of the assurred AM capacity This parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or 256QAM. l Modulation mode of the full AM capacity This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or 256QAM. l E1 capacity This parameter specifies the number of E1s in the hybrid working mode. The number of E1s must not exceed the maximum number of E1s when the committed-capacity modulation scheme is used.
Ethernet Parameters
The parameters that you may frequently set for the GE port of the IFH2 are as follows: l l Basic attributes Flow control
The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length. l Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled. l
3-52
Working mode
3 Boards
There are five working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side. l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF performance
Table 3-39 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 350 140 50 Performance
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-53
3 Boards
Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Performance 10

Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding Supported
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface Performance

The 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45

Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2 Item Dimensions Weight
3-54
Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 580 g

3 Boards
Item Power consumption
Description < 16.4 W
3.7 SL4
The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board. 3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL4 is SL61. 3.7.2 Functions and Features The SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals. 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4. 3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel. 3.7.5 Valid Slots The SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.7.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.7.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.7.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

The SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.
Optical Interface Specifications

l l The SL4 provides S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 optical interfaces. The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.
Optical Module Specifications

l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors. Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser. Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules.
3 Boards
l l
Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power and receive optical power. Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE
The ALS functions as follows: 1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down. 2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval. 3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l l l l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-4 signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-4 signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-4 signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.
l l l l l l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the switching conditions for a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For the details of SNCP, two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l l Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold.
3-56
3 Boards
Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle
Backplane
Paired board
STM-4 STM-4
O/E conversion unit
Overhead processing unit
PXC SCC
SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus STM-4 signal Control bus
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-57
3 Boards

Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4 Proced ure 1 Functional Module O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-4 optical signals. l Detects the R_LOS alarm. l Converts the STM-4 optical signals into electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores the clock signal. l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. 3 Logic processing unit l Processes the clock signal. l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.
NOTE
If a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is configured, the overhead processing unit sends the overhead byte to the paired SL4 to realize the overhead pass-through function.
3-58
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. 2 Overhead processing unit l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets the AU pointer. l Sets multiplex section overheads. l Sets regenerator section overheads. l Performs scrambling. 3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel
TX
STAT SRV LOS
RX
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
SL4
SL4
3-59
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The optical interface of the SL4 reports the R_LOS alarm. The optical interface of the SL4 has no R_LOS alarm.
SRV
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off
LOS
On (red)
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-46 SL4 interface description Interface TX RX Description Transmit port of the STM-4 optical interface Receive port of the STM-4 optical interface Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3 Boards
3.7.5 Valid Slots

The SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20
EXT SL4 EXT SL4 EXT SCC
EXT PXC PXC
3.7.6 Board Feature Code

The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Type of the Optical Module S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Part Number of the Optical Module 34060277 34060280 34060284

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.
J0 Byte
The board supports three modes, which are as follows: l l l Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC
J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
3 Boards
l l l l
Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
STM-4 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 622080 S-4.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1274 to 1356 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-4.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1280 to 1335 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 L-4.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10
NOTE
SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
3-62
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 290 g < 7.2 W
3.8 SL1/SD1
The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61. 3.8.2 Functions and Features The SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SL1/SD1. 3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel. 3.8.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.8.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.8.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.8.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

The SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
3 Boards
Optical Interface Specifications

l l The SL1/SD1 provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces. The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.
Optical Module Specifications

l l l l l Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors. Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser. Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules. Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power and receive optical power. Supports the ALS function.
NOTE
The ALS functions as follows: 1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down. 2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval. 3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
NOTE
Pointer Processing
l l l l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3-64
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

NOTE
l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SL1/SD1.

Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle
Backplane PXC SCC
STM-1 STM-1
O/E conversion unit
SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus STM-1 signal Control bus
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-65
3 Boards

Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1 Proced ure 1 Functional Module O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects the R_LOS alarm. l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores the clock signal. l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. 3 Logic processing unit l Processes the clock signal. l Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.
3-66
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. 2 Overhead processing unit l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets the AU pointer. l Sets multiplex section overheads. l Sets regenerator section overheads. l Performs scrambling. 3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel
TX1
STAT SRV LOS1
RX1
Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
SL1
SD1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
SD1
SL1
3-67
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 has no R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 has no R_LOS alarm.
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
3-68
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Interfaces
Table 3-53 SL1 interface description Interface TX1 Description Transmit port of an STM-1 optical interface Receive port of an STM-1 optical interface Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper
RX1
Table 3-54 SD1 interface description Interface TX1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the first STM-1 optical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the second STM-1 optical interface LC (SFP) Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper
RX1
TX2
RX2
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620
SL1/SD1 EXT FAN
Slot 20
SL1/SD1 EXT EXT SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1 EXT SCC
EXT SL1/SD1 PXC PXC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-69
3 Boards
Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of the Optical Module Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Part Number of the Optical Module 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

J0 Byte
J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows: l l
3-70
Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC

3 Boards
l l
16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1280 to 1335 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
NOTE
SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-71
3 Boards

Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1 Item Description SL1 Dimensions Weight Power consumption SD1
203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 290 g <3W 300 g < 3.9 W
3.9 SLE/SDE
The SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-port electrical STM-1 board. 3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61. 3.9.2 Functions and Features The SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 electrical signals. 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SLE/SDE. 3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. 3.9.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.9.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.9.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

The SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 electrical signals.
3-72
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Overhead Processing
NOTE
Pointer Processing
l l l l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

NOTE
l l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the electrical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-73
3 Boards
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SLE/SDE.

Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle
Backplane STM-1 PXC
STM-1
Line interface unit
Codec unit
SCC
SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus Control bus STM-1 signal

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Line interface unit CODEC unit Processing Flow l The external STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by the transformer and then are sent to the board. l Equalizes the received signals. l Detects the R_LOS alarm. l Performs CMI decoding.
3-74
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Proced ure 3
Functional Module Overhead processing unit
Processing Flow l Restores the clock signal. l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit.

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock. l Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-75
3 Boards
Proced ure 2
Functional Module Overhead processing unit
Processing Flow l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets the AU pointer. l Sets multiplex section overheads. l Sets regenerator section overheads. l Performs scrambling.
3 4
Codec unit Line interface unit
l Performs CMI coding. l The STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by the transformer and then are sent to the external cable.

3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-28 SLE front panel
SLE
STAT SRV
R1
T1
Figure 3-29 SDE front panel

SDE
STAT SRV
R1
T1
R2
T2
3-76
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
SDE
SLE
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Interfaces
Table 3-62 SLE interface description Interface T Description Transmit port of an STM-1 electrical interface Receive port of an STM-1 electrical interface Type of Connector SMB Cable STM-1e cable
Table 3-63 SDE interface description Interface T1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 electrical interface Type of Connector SMB Cable STM-1e cable
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-77
3 Boards
Interface R1
Description Receive port of the first STM-1 electrical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 electrical interface Receive port of the second STM-1 electrical interface
Type of Connector
Cable
T2
SMB
R2
3.9.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620
SLE/SDE EXT FAN
Slot 20
SLE/SDE EXT EXT SLE/SDE EXT SLE/SDE SCC
EXT SLE/SDE PXC PXC
Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE Item Slot assignment priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

J0 Byte
By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is
3 Boards
automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.
". The
J1 Byte
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 155520 CMI One coaxial wire pair 75

Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE Item Description SLE Dimensions Weight Power consumption
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
SDE
203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 300 g < 4.2 W 330 g < 4.9 W
3-79
3 Boards
3.10 PL3
The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board. 3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the PL3 is SL61. 3.10.2 Functions and Features The PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals. 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PL3. 3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel. 3.10.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.10.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte. 3.10.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

The PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.
Service Signal Processing

l l Supports the setting and querying of the type of the accessed service signal by the software (E3 or T3). Supports the setting and querying of the input/output equalization of the T3 service signal.
Overhead and Pointer Processing

l l l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3 level. Supports the querying of the J1 and C2 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1 and C2 bytes.
Clock Function
Supports the first and third E3/T3 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.
3 Boards
l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the E3/T3 tributary. Supports the PRBS 15 test. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PL3.

Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle
Backplane E1/T3
E1/T3
Line interface unit
Codec unit
Mapping/ Demapping unit
PXC
SCC Logic control unit Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Line interface unit Processing Flow l The external E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the board.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-81
3 Boards
Proced ure 2
Functional Module Codec unit
Processing Flow l Equalizes the received signal. l Restores the clock signal. l Detects the T_ALOS alarm. l Performs HDB3 decoding (in the case of E3 signals) or B3ZS decoding (in the case of T3 signals).
l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3. l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be VC-3. l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3. l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3. l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one C-4. l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the VC-4 is formed.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping/ Demapping unit Processing Flow l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3. l Processes the TU pointer and demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Extracts E3/T3 signals. 3 4 Codec unit Line interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding (in the case of E3 signals) or B3ZS coding (in the case of T3 signals). l The E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the external cable.
3-82
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel
PL3
STAT SRV
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
Indicators
Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
SRV
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
PL3
3-83
3 Boards
Interfaces
Table 3-70 PL3 interface description Interface T1 Description Transmit port of the first E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the first E3/T3 electrical interface Transmit port of the second E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the second E3/T3 electrical interface Transmit port of the third E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the third E3/T3 electrical interface SMB SMB Type of Connector SMB Cable E3/T3 cable
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
3.10.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620
EXT PL3 FAN
Slot 20
EXT PL3 EXT PL3 EXT PL3 SCC
EXT PL3 PXC PXC
Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 description slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5
3-84
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.
J1 Byte
This section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
E3/T3 Interface Performance

The performance of the E3/T3 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance Item Performance E3 Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) 34368 HDB3 One coaxial wire pair 75 T3 44736 B3ZS

Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3 Item Dimensions Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Item Weight Power consumption
Description 310 g < 5.1 W
3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1
The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1 tributary board. 3.11.1 Version Description The PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of the PH1/PD1 is SL61. 3.11.2 Functions and Features The PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.The PD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1. 3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.11.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.11.6 Board Feature Code The interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code. 3.11.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte. 3.11.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of the PH1/PD1 is SL61. Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1 Item Connector type of E1 interface E1 interface impedance SL61PO1 DB44 75 ohm or 120 ohm SL62PO1 RJ-45 120 ohm
3-86
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

The PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.The PD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing

l l l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J2 and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 byte.
Clock Functions
l l Supports the retiming function of E1 signals. Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.
l l l l Supports inloop and outloop at the E1 tributary. Supports the PRBS 15 test. Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.

Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle
Backplane E1
E1
Line interface unit
Codec unit
PXC
SCC Logic control unit Service bus Control bus E1 signal
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-87
3 Boards

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Line interface unit Codec unit Processing Flow l The external E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the board. l Equalizes the received signal. l Restores the clock signal. l Detects the T_ALOS alarm. l Performs HDB3 decoding. 3 Mapping/ Demapping unit l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-12. l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be VC-12. l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-12. l Three TU-12s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one TUG-2. l Seven TUG-2s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one TUG-3. l Three TUG-3s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one C-4. l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the VC-4 is formed. 4 Logic processing unit l Processes the clock signal. l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Proced ure 1 Functional module Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes the clock signal. l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.
3-88
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Proced ure 2
Functional module Mapping/ Demapping unit
Processing Flow l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the corresponding alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1 signals.
3 4
Codec unit Line interface unit
l Performs HDB3 coding. l The E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the external cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC.
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel
SL61PO1
1~8
PO1
SL62PO1
PO1
STAT SRV
STAT SRV
Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel

1~8 9~16
PH1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
STAT SRV
PH1
PO1
PO1
3-89
3 Boards
Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel

PD1
STAT SRV
Indicators
Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Interfaces
Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description Interface 1-8 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces Type of Connector DB44 Cable E1 cable to the external equipment or E1 cable to the E1 Panel
3-90
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
PD1
1-16
17-32
3 Boards
Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description Interface 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces Type of Connector RJ-45 Cable The cables need to be made on site by terminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors
Table 3-80 PH1 interface description Interface 1-8 9-16 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces 9 to 16 E1 interfaces Type of Connector DB44 DB44 Cable E1 cable to the external equipment or E1 cable to the E1 Panel
Table 3-81 PD1 interface description Interface 1-16 17-32 Description 1 to 16 E1 interfaces 17 to 32 E1 interfaces Type of Connector MDR68 MDR68 Cable E1 transit cable
For the pin assignments of the DB44 interface of the SL61PO1/PH1 board, see Figure 3-38 and refer toTable 3-82. For the pin assignment of the RJ-45 interface of the SL62PO1 board, see Figure 3-39, and refer to Table 3-83. For the pin assignments of the MDR68 interface of the PD1 board, see Figure 3-40 and refer to Table 3-85. Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)
Pos. 1
Pos. 44
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-91
3 Boards
Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1) Pin 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Others Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) Reserved Pin 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) -
Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)
87654321
Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1) Interface n (n: 1-8) Pin 1 2
3-92
Signal The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (+) The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (-)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Interface
Pin 4 5 3, 6, 7, 8
Signal The nth E1 receiving differential signal (+) The nth E1 receiving differential signal (-) Reserved
The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-84. Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1) Indicator Yellow indicator Status On Off Green indicator Meaning The E1 signal is lost. The E1 signal is normal. Reserved.
Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)
Pos. 1
Pos. 68
Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1) Pin 36 35 42 41 46 45 50 49 Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) Pin 38 37 40 39 44 43 48 47 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-)
3-93
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Pin 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 22 21 26 25 30 29 34 33 55 56 59 60 63 64 67 68 Others
Signal 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) Reserved
Pin 1 2 5 6 9 10 13 14 20 19 24 23 28 27 32 31 53 54 57 58 61 62 65 66 -
Signal 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 9th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 9th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 10th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 10th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 11th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 11th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 12th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 12th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 13th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 13th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 14th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 14th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 15th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 15th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 16th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 16th E1 receiving differential signal (-) -
3.11.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
3-94
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620

EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 FAN
Slot 20
EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1 EXT EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 SCC
PO1/PH1/PD1 EXT PXC PXC
Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Item Slot assignment priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

The interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code. Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Board Feature Code A B Interface Impedance (ohm) 75 120

In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte.
J2 Byte
The board supports two modes, which are as follows: l l Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-95
3 Boards
This section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
The performance of the E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-88 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 2048 HDB3 One coaxial wire pair 75 One symmetrical wire pair 120

Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1 Item Description PO1 Dimensions Weight Power consumption PH1 PD1
203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 280 g <2W 310 g < 2.8 W 380 g < 5.8 W
3.12 EFT4
The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board. 3.12.1 Version Description The EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B. 3.12.2 Functions and Features The EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals. 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFT4. 3.12.4 Front Panel
3 Boards
There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel. 3.12.5 Valid Slots The IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.12.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.12.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B. Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B Function LPT SL61EFT4VER.A Not supported SL61EFT4VER.B Supported

The EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing

l l l l l Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet port. Supports the point-to-point link state pass through (LPT) function (only the SL61EFT4VER.B provides this function).
NOTE
For the details of the features of Ethernet ports and LPT, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signals

l l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Supports the following encapsulation formats: high level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP). Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s. Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1-6). Supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS).
3 Boards
NOTE
For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Overhead Processing
l l l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l l l l Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports events and alarms.
NOTE
l For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. l For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l l l l l l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFT4.
3-98
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle
Backplane FE Interface module PXC
FE
Service processing module
Encapsulation module
Mapping module
PXC
SCC Control and communication module Service bus Control bus FE

Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Encapsulation module Mapping module Logic processing unit Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Performs mapping at the VC-12/VC-3 level for the data frames after encapsulation. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.
3 4 5
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-99
3 Boards

Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 5 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Interface processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demaps the signal at the VC-12/VC-3 level. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sends the generated FE signal to the Ethernet port.

3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel
EFT4
STAT SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
3-100
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
EFT4
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Interfaces
Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description Interface FE1-FE4 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Cable Network cable
For the front view and pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces, see Figure 3-44 and refer to Table 3-95. Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view
87654321
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-101
3 Boards
Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces Interface FE1-FE4 Pin 1 2 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Reserved
FE1-FE4 interfaces each have two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-96. Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator LINK (green) Status On Off ACT (yellow) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620
EXT EFT4 FAN
Slot 20
EXT EFT4 EXT EFT4 EXT EFT4 SCC
EXT EFT4 PXC PXC
3-102
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.
SDH Parameters
The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set. l J1 byte The board supports four modes, which are as follows: Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". l J2 byte The board supports two modes, which are as follows: Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.
Ethernet External Port Parameters

The EFT4 provides four external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT4. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows: port enabled, working mode, maximum frame length, and flow control. l Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled. l Working mode The board supports three working modes as follows: Auto-negotiation
3 Boards
10M full-duplex 100M full-duplex By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. When the equipment on the opposite side adopts the auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, or 100M full-duplex mode, the local equipment should be set to the same working mode. When the equipment on the opposite side adopts 10M half-duplex or 100M half-duplex, the local equipment should be set to the auto-negotiation mode. l Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement. l Flow control The board supports three flow control modes as follows: Disabled mode Autonegotiation flow control mode Non-autonegotiation flow control mode By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port has the following abilities: Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE frames Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received PAUSE frames Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.
3 Boards
The flow control parameter should be set depending on that of the equipment on the opposite side.
Ethernet Internal Port Parameters

The EFT4 provides four internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK4, corresponding to PORT1 to PORT4 respectively. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS. l Encapsulation/Mapping protocol The board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFP is the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same as the protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side. l Bound path All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 63. l LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.
This section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
FE electrical Interface Performance

FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-105
3 Boards

Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 306 g 7.5 W
3.13 EMS6
The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board. 3.13.1 Version Description The EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B. 3.13.2 Functions and Features The EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services. 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EMS6. 3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.13.5 Valid Slots The EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.13.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.13.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.13.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.
3-106
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B Function LPT SL61EMS6VER.A Not supported SL61EMS6VER.B Supported

The EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services.

l l Provides GE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces by using two SFP modules. The GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface. Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are as follows: The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working modes. l l Supports the setting and querying of the network attributes of the Ethernet ports. The following three network attributes are available: UNI, C-aware, and S-aware. Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of an Ethernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is set to UNI. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. External ports PORT1-PORT6 and internal ports VCTRUNK5-VCTRUNK8 support JUMBO frames. Internal ports VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 do not support JUMBO frames. l l l l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x (only for transparently transmitted Ethernet services). Supports the point-to-point LPT function and the point-to-multipoint LPT function (only the SL61EMS6VER.B provides this function). Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function. Supports Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE
l l
For the details of the features of Ethernet ports, LPT, LAG, and ERPS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services

l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.

3 Boards
l l l l l l
Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping.
NOTE
For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
QinQ Service Processing

l l l l Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad. Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag. Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).
NOTE
For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Ethernet Service QoS Processing

l Supports the following traffic classifications: Port-based traffic classification Port+CVLAN-based traffic classification Port+SVLAN-based traffic classification Port+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification l l l l Supports traffic-based CAR. Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocates packets to different egress queues. Supports PORT-based or PORT queue-based traffic shaping. An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP, WRR, or SP+WRR queue scheduling mode.
NOTE
For the details of the Ethernet QoS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Ethernet OAM Processing

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag: Management of OAM maintenance points Continuity check test Loopback test Link trace test
3 Boards
Ping test Performance test l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah: OAM automatic discovery Link performance monitoring Fault detection Remote loopback initiating Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking
NOTE
For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Traffic Statistics
l Supports traffic monitoring over Ethernet interfaces. The received traffic threshold can be set for Ethernet interfaces and an alarm is reported when the received traffic exceeds the threshold. Supports traffic statistics over Ethernet interfaces. The period of traffic statistics is 15 minutes and the statistic data can be stored for 30 days.

l l l l Supports the following encapsulation formats: HDLC, LAPS, and GFP. Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s. Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1-6). Supports the LCAS.
NOTE
For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Overhead Processing
l l l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

l l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports RMON performance events and alarms.
3 Boards
NOTE
l l l l l l l l Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the SFP module.
NOTE
l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected. When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset is performed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

This section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EMS6.

Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle
Backplane FE/GE Interface module FE/GE PXC
Mapping module
PXC
Control and communication module Service bus Control bus
Mail box
SCC
FE/GE
3-110
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE/GE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Classifies the traffic according to the service format and configuration requirements (for example, Ethernet packet, VLAN packet, and other packet format). Processes tags according to the service type. Forwards data frames according to the service type. 3 4 Encapsulation module Mapping module Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Performs mapping at the VC-12, VC-3, or at a corresponding virtual concatenation level for the data frames after encapsulation. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demaps the signal at the VC-12, VC-3, or at a corresponding virtual concatenation level. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Forwards data frames according to the service type. Processes tags according to the service type.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-111
3 Boards
Proced ure 5
Functional Module Interface processing module
Processing Flow Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the Ethernet frame signal, and sends the generated FE/GE signal to the Ethernet port.

The communication and control module of the EMS6 consists of the CPU and its peripheral circuits. The EMS6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration data and querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EMS6 through the communication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside the EMS6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through the communication and control module.
3.13.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel
EMS6
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 ACTIV1 LINK2 ACTIV2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE2
Indicators
Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
PROG
100 ms on (green), and 100 ms off
3-112
EMS6
3 Boards
Indicator
Status 300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off
Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost.
On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off
On (red)
Off SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Green indicator (LINK1) On Off Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing Off
The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The link at the GE1 port is normal. The link at the GE1 port fails. The GE1 port is transmitting or receiving data. The GE1 port is not transmitting or receiving data. The link at the GE2 port is normal. The link at the GE2 port fails. The GE2 port is transmitting or receiving data.
3-113
Green indicator (LINK2)
On Off
Yellow indicator (ACTIV2)
On or flashing
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The GE2 port is not transmitting or receiving data.
Interfaces
Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description Interfac e FE1-FE4 GE1GE2 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Gigabit Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Replaceable SFP module l Optical module: Uses the LC connector, and supports 1000BASE-SX and 1000BASE-LX. l Electrical module: Uses the RJ-45 connector and supports 10/100/1000BASE-T(X). Cable Network cable. l When the optical module is used, use the fiber jumper. l When the electrical module is used, use the network cable.
The FE port and GE electrical port of the EMS6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-48 and refer to Table 3-105 and Table 3-106. Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view
87654321
3-114
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-115
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Reserved
The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-107. Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EMS6. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface of the EMS6 is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.13.5 Valid Slots

The EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620
EMS6 EXT FAN
Slot 20
EMS6 EXT EXT EMS6 EXT EMS6 SCC
EXT EMS6 PXC PXC
3-116
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

The type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Module Type 1000BASE-SX (0.55 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) BOM Code of the Module 34060286 34060219 34100052

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.
SDH Parameters
The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set. l J1 byte The board supports the following four modes: single-byte mode, 16-byte mode with CRC, 16-byte mode without CRC, and 64-byte mode. By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string). l J2 byte The board supports the following two modes: single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

The EMS6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows:
3 Boards
l l l l l
Basic attributes TAG attributes Network attributes Flow control Advanced attributes
The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length. l Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled. l Working mode The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working modes. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. l Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement. The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters: l TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows: Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packets that contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change. l Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet.
3 Boards
Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.
The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows: l l l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.
The board supports the following flow control modes:autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side. l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control mode according to the auto-negotiation result. l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcast packet suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services and also effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the
3 Boards
broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold. l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not use the broadcast packet suppression function. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcast packets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold. l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the range from 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds Nx10%.

The EMS6 provides eight internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK8. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS. l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters: TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows: Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of packets that contain a TAG, the port simply receives the packets without any change. Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet. Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1. l Encapsulation/Mapping protocol The board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFP is the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same as the protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side. l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By
3-120
3 Boards
default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows: UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag. l Bound path All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 63. l LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.
This section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
GE Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the GE optical interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000 1000Base-SX Multi-mode fiber 0.5 770 to 860 -9.5 to 0 -17 0 9 1000Base-LX Single-mode fiber 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -19 -3 9
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-121
3 Boards
NOTE
Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
GE Electrical Interface Performance

The GE electrical interface is 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface and compliant with IEEE 802.3. The GE electrical interface is compatible with FE electrical interfaces. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45
NOTE
Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules to provide 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interfaces.

FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45
3-122
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 400 g < 12.3 W
3.14 EFP6
The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board. 3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the EFP6 is SL61. 3.14.2 Functions and Features The EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supports transparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services. 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFP6. 3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel. 3.14.5 Valid Slots The EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620. 3.14.6 NM Configuration Reference On the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.14.7 Technical Specifications This section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

The EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supports transparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-123
3 Boards

l Sets and queries working modes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports five working modes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M half duplex, and auto-negotiation. Sets and queries network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, UNI, C-Aware, and S-Aware. Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of an Ethernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is set to UNI. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length ranging from 1518 to 2000 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with the maximum frame length of 2000 bytes. Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet interfaces (only for transparently transmitted Ethernet services). Supports the point-to-point and point-to-multipoint link state pass through (LPT) functions. Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
NOTE
l l
l l l l l
For details on features of Ethernet interfaces, LPT, and LAG, see theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services

l l l l l l l Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT. Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping.
NOTE
For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
QinQ Service Processing

l l l l Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad. Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag. Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).
NOTE
For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3-124
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Ethernet Service QoS Processing

l Supports the following traffic classifications: PORT-based traffic classification PORT+VLAN-based traffic classification PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI-based traffic classification PORT+SVLAN-based traffic classification PORT+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification l l l l Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocates packets to different egress queues. Supports traffic-based CAR. Supports PORT queue-based traffic shaping. An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP+WRR queue scheduling mode.
NOTE
For details on the Ethernet QoS, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Ethernet OAM Processing

l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag: Management of OAM maintenance points Continuity check test Loopback test Link trace test Ping test Performance test l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah: OAM automatic discovery Link performance monitoring Fault detection Remote loopback initiating Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking
NOTE
For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

l l l Supports the GFP encapsulation format. Supports an uplink bandwidth of 63xE1. Supports virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv (X = 1-16). When implemented on the NMS, virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv is considered as virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv. Supports LCAS.
l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
NOTE
For details on encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
Overhead Processing
l l Queries the J2 and V5 bytes. Sets the J2 and V5 bytes.

l l l l Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports events and alarms.
NOTE
l l l l l l l l Supports port mirroring. Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports VC-12 inloop toward the backplane direction. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE
l For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. l Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected. When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset is performed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFP6.
3-126
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6
Backplane FE Interface module FE PXC
Mapping module
PXC
Control and communication module Service bus Control bus
Mail box
SCC
FE signal

Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Classifies the traffic according to the service format and configuration requirements (for example, Ethernet packet, VLAN packet, and other packet format). Processes tags according to the service type. Forwards data frames according to the service type. 3 4 Encapsulation module Mapping module Performs GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Maps the encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames to the corresponding VC-12s. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-127
3 Boards

Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Extracts the E1 payload from the VC-12s and demaps the E1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Forwards data frames according to the service type. Processes tags according to the service type. 5 Interface processing module Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sends the generated FE signal to the Ethernet interface.

The communication and control module of the EFP6 consists of the CPU and its peripheral circuits. The EFP6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration data and querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EFP6 through the communication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside the EFP6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through the communication and control module.
3.14.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.
Diagram of the Front Panel

Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6
EFP6
STAT PROG SRV
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
3-128
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
EFP6
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6 Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is running, the software is running normally. 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-129
3 Boards
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The services are not configured.
Interfaces
Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6 Interfac e FE1-FE6 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Corresponding Cable Network cable
The FE interfaces on the EFP6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-52 and refer to Table 3-118 and Table 3-119. Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view
87654321
Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3-130
Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved
3 Boards
Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) -
The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-120. Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
3.14.5 Valid Slots

The EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620
EFP6 EXT FAN
Slot 20
EXT EFP6 EXT EFP6 EXT EFP6 SCC
EFP6 EXT PXC PXC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-131
3 Boards
Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

On the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.
SDH Parameters
Byte J2 is the SDH parameter that you may frequently set. The board supports the single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the other 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The last five characters of the string are blank spaces.

The EFP6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows: l l l l l Basic attributes TAG attributes Network attributes Flow control Advanced attributes
The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length. l Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled. l Working mode In the case of FE electrical ports, there are four working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation . Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description. l Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 2000 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller
3 Boards
than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement. The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters: l TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows: Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packets that contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change. l Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet. l Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1. The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows: l l l UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.
The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side. l The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric flow control
3 Boards
The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port has the following abilities: Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE frames Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received PAUSE frames Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion l The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows: Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames. Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames. The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcast packet suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services and also effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold. l The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not use the broadcast packet suppression function. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcast packets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold. l The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the range from 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds Nx10%.

The EFP6 provides 16 internal ports, namely, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK16. The parameters that you may frequently set for each internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, network attribute, bound path, and LCAS. l The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters:
3-134
3 Boards
TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows: Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. The port adds a TAG to the packets that do not contain a TAG according to the VLAN ID of the port. Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet. Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1. l The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows: UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag. l Bound path On the EFP6, a VCTRUNK can bind VC-12 channels (Ethernet services are encapsulated to the payload of VC-12 channels, namely, to E1 signals). A VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 channels. l LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.
3.14.7 Technical Specifications

This section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance.
3 Boards
Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45

Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Performance 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 400 g < 11.6 W
3.15 PXC
The PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board. 3.15.1 Version Description The functional version of the PXC is SL61. 3.15.2 Functions and Features The PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies power to other boards. 3.15.3 Working Principle This section describes the working principle of the PXC. 3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label on the front panel. 3.15.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3. 3.15.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters. 3.15.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronization performance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
3 Boards

The functional version of the PXC is SL61.

The PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies power to other boards.
Power Processing
l l l l Receives one input of -48 V/-60 V power. Outputs one -48 V and one +3.3 V power for other boards. Supplies power to the components of the board. Detects and protects the input power.
Clock Processing
l l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for other boards. Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Supports clock protection based on clock priority, SSM protocol, or extended SSM protocol. Supports the detection of the external clock source. Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes. One PXC supports one input and one output of the external clock. The external clock interface can be used as the wayside service interface. The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes, synchronous data overhead bytes, asynchronous data overhead bytes, and orderwire overhead bytes.
l l l l l l
Cross-Connection Processing
l l l l l Grooms inter-board service signals. Provides full timeslot cross-connection of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 equivalent to 16x16 VC-4. Provides cross-connection of 16x16 pointer indication signals. Supports service signal broadcasting. Supports the AU_AIS alarm being transparently transmitted by the service path that VC-4s can pass through.
l l l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Supports 1+1 standby for the input power and 1+1 standby for the internal power module. Supports 1+1 hot standby of its clock unit and cross-connect unit. Supports the SNCP switching. Supports the linear MSP. Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring on STM-4 optical transmission links.
3 Boards
Supports the HSB switching.
l l l l Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
When a warm reset is performed, the software modules of the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.
3.15.3 Working Principle

This section describes the working principle of the PXC.

Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC
Backplane External clock unit SCC Clock unit Other boards Crossconnect unit Service boards
SCC Logic control unit
-48V
Power unit
-48V Other boards +3.3V
Service bus Overhead bus
Clock signal Control bus
External clock signal
External Clock Unit

In the receive direction, the external clock unit accesses one 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s signal. If the signal accessed is a wayside service signal, it is multiplexed into a 2M timeslot of an 8M overhead signal and then sent to the SCC. If the signal accessed is a clock signal, it is sent to the clock unit. In the transmit direction, to output the external clock, the unit receives an external clock signal from the clock unit. To output the wayside service signal, the unit demultiplexes the wayside service signal from the 8M overhead signal.
3 Boards
Clock Unit
The clock unit detects and selects the external clock source or the service clock source from service boards. Through the phase-locked loop, the unit outputs the system clock and frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for other units on the PXC and also other boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit is a three-level cross-connect matrix. The first level and the third level are space division cross-connect matrixes that support VC-4 cross-connection only, with a crossconnect capacity of 16x16 VC-4s. The first level is called forward cross-connection and the third level is called backward cross-connection. The second level is a time division matrix that supports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connection, with the cross-connect capacity equivalent to 16x16 VC-4s. It is called lower order cross-connection. The lower order cross-connect matrix is the core of a cross-connect unit. The forward and backward cross-connect matrixes are used to improve the speed at which the cross-connect unit implements service protection switching. Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture
Forward cross-connect matrix 1#VC-4 Lower order cross-connect matrix Backward crossconnect matrix 1#VC-4
16#VC-4
Equivalent ... 16x16 VC-4 ... ... 16x16 VC-4 ... to 16x16 VC-4
16#VC-4
Power Unit
The power unit processes the input -48 V/-60 V power as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from very high input current. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from reverse polar connection of the input power. Performs EMI filtering for the input current and detects whether the input current is very high or very low. Distributes one power input to the -48 V power bus in the backplane, to supply -48 V power to the SCC and IF boards. Uses a DC/AC power module to convert the other power input into +3.3 V power and then sends it to the +3.3 V power bus in the backplane, to supply +3.3 V power to the other boards.
The power unit also supplies power to the chips on the PXC.
Logic Control Unit

The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command
3 Boards
response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.
3.15.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-56 PXC front panel
PXC
STAT PWR SYNC ACT
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
PULL
CLKO
CLKI
Indicators
Table 3-124 PXC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. PWR On (green) On (red) The power supply is working normally. The +3.3 V power supply is faulty, or the input -48 V power supply is abnormal. There is no power access. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost.
Off SYNC On (green) On (red)
3-140
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
PXC
-48V-60V
SYS-PWR
3 Boards
Indicator ACT
Status On (green)
Meaning The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-125 PXC interface description Interface CLKI Description External clock/ wayside service input port External clock/ wayside service output port Power input (+) Power output (-) Input power switch Type-D Power cable Type of Connector SMB Cable External clock cable/wayside service cable
CLIO
RTN(+) NEG(-) SYS-PWRa
NOTE
a: The SYS-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label and an operation guidance label on the front panel. l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-141
3 Boards
3.15.5 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3. Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20
EXT EXT EXT SCC
EXT PXC PXC
Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 1 > slot 3
NOTE
When the system is powered on and the two PXCs are already seated, the PXC in slot 1 is the active board and the one in slot 3 is the standby. If one PXC is inserted when another is already in the working state, the existing board becomes the active board and the newly inserted board becomes the standby board.

In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.
Clock Source and Clock Source Priority

Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be a line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Select the required clock source and then set the clock source priority. By default, the PXC employs the internal clock source, that is, the clock working in the free-run mode.
Clock Protection
For the PXC, clocks are protected based on the clock source priority, SSM, or extended SSM protocols. Determine the clock protection scheme as required. By default, the PXC protects clocks according to the clock source priority.
Input External Clock Parameter Setting

To input an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock. If the SSM or extended SSM protocols are enabled, also set the S1 byte of the external clock.
3 Boards
Output External Clock Parameter Setting

To output an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock and also the clock source traced by the 2M phase-locked loop.
This section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronization performance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G. 703 13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Frequency accuracy Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 One coaxial wire pair 75
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-143
3 Boards

Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 540 g < 7.5 W
3.16 SCC
The SCC is a system control and communication board. 3.16.1 Version Description The SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C and SL61SCCVER.E. 3.16.2 Functions and Features The SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also various management and auxiliary interfaces. 3.16.3 Working Principle This section describes the working principle of the SCC . 3.16.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator test switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card The SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card. 3.16.6 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2. 3.16.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IP address, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, and asynchronous data interface parameters. 3.16.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance, synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C and SL61SCCVER.E.
3-144
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions Item Synchronous data interface Orderwire spanning function Power module SL61SCCVER.B Does not provide the interface. Does not support the function. Provides the module. SL61SCCVER.C 1 Supports the function. Does not provide the module. SL61SCCVER.E 1 Supports the function. Provides the module.

The SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also various management and auxiliary interfaces.
System Control and Communications

l l l l l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and ODUs by using the NE software. Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the SCC. The board software of all the other boards except the EMS6 is integrated on the SCC. Collects performance events and alarms. Communicates with the NM system and processes at most 12-channel DCC. Cross-connects overheads.
Management and Auxiliary Interfaces

l l l l l l l Provides one NM interface and one NE cascade interface. Provides one management serial port. Provides one 6-input and 2-output alarm interface. Provides one asynchronous data interface. Provides one 64 kbit/s G.703-compliant synchronous data interface (only the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E provides this function). Provides one orderwire interface. Supports the setting of the synchronous data interface as a transparent transmission interface for orderwire bytes to realize the orderwire spanning function (only the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E provides this function).
l l l l l
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Processes the protection switching of 1+1 protection configuration. Processes clock protection switching. Processes linear MSP switching. Processes the protection switching of a two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring. Processes SNCP switching.
3 Boards
Provides +3.3 V power standby protection (Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides this function).
l l l l l Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the board temperature. Supports the detecting of all the indicators of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

This section describes the working principle of the SCC .

Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC
Orderwire interface External alarm input/output interface Asynchronous data interface Synchronous data interface Auxiliary interface unit Overhead crossconnect unit Backplane Other boards
Power unit NM interface NE cascade interface Debugging serial port Control and communication unit Control bus
-48V +3.3V
PXC Other boards Other boards IF1A/IF1B
Overhead bus
ODU control signal
NOTE
l The SL61SCC of VER.B does not have the synchronous data interface. l The SL61SCC of VER.C does not have the power unit.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E processes the input and output of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and synchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus. The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.B processes the input and output of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit.
3 Boards
The data of the orderwire interface and asynchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus.
Overhead Cross-Connect Unit

The overhead cross-connect unit cross-connects the overheads from the auxiliary unit, control and communication unit, and other boards, and thus the following functions are realized. l l l The DCC processed by the control and communication unit is added/dropped to/from the line. The orderwire and asynchronous data is added/dropped to/from the line. The orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between lines can be interworked.
Control and Communication Unit

The control and communication unit is composed of a CPU and its peripheral circuit. This unit performs the following functions: l l l l l Controls and manages the IDU and other boards, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the ODU by the ODU control signal transmitted between the serial port and the SMODEM in the IF board. Communicates with the NM system by processing DCC bytes and the NM data that are transmitted from the NM interface. Performs configuration management, performance management, and alarm management according to NM commands. Performs protection management.
Power Unit
Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides the power unit. The power unit performs the following functions: l l l Converts the input -48 V power into +3.3 V power. Realizes the backup function of the internal power modules. Supplies power to the chips on the SCC.
3.16.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator test switch, and labels on the front panel.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-147
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 SCC front panel
SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST RST
SCC
SYSTEM
COM
ETH
ETH-HUB
PHONE
ALM/AUX
SCCVER.B
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST
SCC
RST
SYSTEM
COM
ETH
ETH-HUB
PHONE
ALM/S1
Indicators
Table 3-131 SCC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. PROG On: 100 ms (green) Off: 100 ms When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initiated. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
On: 300 ms (green) Off: 300 ms
On (green) On: 100 ms (red) Off: 100 ms
3-148
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
SCC
SCC
3 Boards
Indicator
Status On (red)
Meaning l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory selfcheck fails or loading upper layer software fails. l When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off ALM On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off MANT On (yellow)
The software is running normally. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. The system has no power access. The system is in the maintenance state. The maintenance state includes loopback, laser shutdown, and ODU transmitting in silence. The system is in the working state.
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-132 SCC interface description Interface PHONE COM ETH ETH-HUB
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Description Orderwire interface Management port NM Ethernet interface NE cascade interface
Type of Connector RJ-11 DB9 RJ-45 RJ-45
Cable Orderwire line Serial port cable Network cable Network cable
3-149
3 Boards
Interface ALM/AUX (SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E ) ALM/S1 (SCCVER.B)
Description l SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E : external alarm interface/ synchronous data interface/ asynchronous data interface l SCCVER.B: external alarm interface/ asynchronous data interface
Type of Connector DB26
Cable Auxiliary interface cable
RST LAMP TEST
Ward reset switch Indicator test switcha
NOTE
a: Press the LAMP TEST button, and all the indicators of the IDU turn on except for the indicators on the Ethernet interface. Release the button, and the indicators return to the original state.
For the pin assignments of the COM interface, see Figure 3-60 and refer to Table 3-133. Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface
Pos.1
Pos.9
Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface Interface COM Pin 2 3 4 5 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Signal Receiving data Transmitting data Data terminal ready Ground Reserved
3-150
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
For the pin assignments of the ETH or the ETH-HUB connector, see Figure 3-61 and refer to Table 3-134. Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface
87654321
Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface Interface ETH/ETH-HUB Pin 1 2 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Reserved
NOTE
The ETH/ETH-HUB interface supports MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing, which means it can also transmit data through pins 3 and 6, and receive data through pins 1 and 3.
The ETH/ETH-HUB interface has two indicators. For the description of the two indicators, refer to Table 3-135. Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description Indicator LINK (green) Status On Off ACT (yellow) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-151
3 Boards
CAUTION
The ETH and the ETH-HUB are like two ports of a hub. When the two ports are used in networking, they cannot be connected to each other through Ethernet links. Otherwise, an Ethernet loop is formed which can result in a network storm and repeated NE resetting. Figure 3-62 shows two wrong connection modes.
Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST
RST
SCC
SYSTEM
COM
ETH
ETH-HUB
PHONE
ALM/AUX
LAN
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST RST
SCC
SYSTEM
COM
ETH
ETH-HUB
PHONE
ALM/AUX
For the pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface, see Figure 3-63 and refer toTable 3-136. Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface
Pos.1
Pos.26
Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface Interface ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) Pin 1 10 19
3-152
Signal The 1st input alarm signal Ground of the 1st input alarm signal The 2nd input alarm signal
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
SCC
SCC
3 Boards
Interface
Pin 2 11 20 3 21 4 13 22 5 14 23 6 24 16 8 25 7 9 12 15 17 18, 26
Signal Ground of the 2nd input alarm signal The 3rd input alarm signal Ground of the 3rd input alarm signal The 1st output alarm signal (+) The 1st output alarm signal (-) The 4th input alarm signal Ground of the 4th input alarm signal The 5th input alarm signal Ground of the 5th input alarm signal The 6th input alarm signal Ground of the 6th input alarm signal The 2nd output alarm signal (+) The 2nd output alarm signal (-) The asynchronous interface transmitting data The asynchronous interface receiving data Signal ground The synchronous data interface receiving data (+) Signal ground The synchronous data interface receiving data (-) The synchronous data interface transmitting data (+) The synchronous data interface transmitting data (-) Reserved
NOTE
The SCC of VER.B does not support the synchronous data interface. Hence, pins 7, 12, 15, and 17 of the ALM/AUX interface cannot be used.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-153
3 Boards
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label and an operation warning label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70 C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board.
3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card

The SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card. The storage card stores the following information: l l l l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data NE software and all the board software programs All the FPGA logics License file for radio link capability
Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card

SL61SCCVER.C or SL61SCCVER.E
1 2
JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1
Jumper definition 1 2 JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1
SL61SCCVER.B 9 2 1 10
JUMP1 JUMP2 JUMP3 JUMP4

1. Jumpers 2. Storage card
3-154
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) JUMP4 0 0 0 0 0 JUMP3 0 0 0 0 1 JUMP2 0 0 1 1 0 JUMP1 0 1 0 1 0 Normal operating state. Reserved. Reserved. Commissioning state. Operating state, with the WatchDog disabled and memory undergone full check. BIOS holdover state. Even if the NE software exists, it is not running. The IP address is always 129.9.0.5. The IP in the parameter area does not change for the convenience of querying. Exhibition mode. Data recover state. Reserved. Reserved. To erase the system parameter area. To erase database.
3-155
Function
0 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 0
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards
Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) JUMP4 1 JUMP3 1 JUMP2 0 JUMP1 0
Function
To erase NE software and its patches. To erase database, NE software and its patches. To format the file system so that all the data is erased. To format the file system so that all the data is erased (file system + extended BIOS + system parameter area).
3.16.6 Valid Slots

In the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2. Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20
EXT EXT EXT SCC
EXT PXC PXC
NOTE
An SCC integrates an EOW subboard which occupies the logical slot 21.

In the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IP address, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, and asynchronous data interface parameters.
3 Boards
NE ID
The NE ID is a 24-bit hexadecimal number, which is used to identify the NE in ECC communication. The higher 8 bits of an NE ID are called the subnet ID, or the extended ID, whereas the lower 16 bits are called the basic ID. For example, for the NE ID 0x090001, "9" is the subnet ID or extended ID and "1" is the basic ID. By default, the NE ID is 0x09BFF0, with the subnet ID or extended ID as "9" and the basic ID as "49136".
NE IP Address
IP addresses are used and thus are valid only in TCP/IP communication. By default, the NE IP address is 129.9.191.240.
Orderwire Interface Parameters

Orderwire interface parameters include the orderwire phone number and the overhead byte used to transmit orderwire. The orderwire phone number is used to identify the phone in point-to-point addressing call. This parameter is set based on the orderwire planning. Generally, the orderwire phone number is set with three digits. The overhead byte used to transmit orderwire can be set to use the E1 or E2 byte, however, this setting is invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of whether the E1 or E2 byte is set.
Synchronous Data Interface Parameters

In the case of optical and electrical SDH lines, the synchronous data interface always uses the F1 byte. In the case of SDH/PDH microwave links, the synchronous data interface always uses a microwave self-defined byte.
Asynchronous Interface Parameters

Asynchronous interface parameters include the asynchronous data interface type and the overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data. The asynchronous data interface type is RS-232. The overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data can be set to any byte of Serial 1 to Serial 4, as shown in Figure 3-66. This setting is, however, invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of which serial byte is set.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-157
3 Boards
Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame

A1 B1 D1 AU - PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 Serial 4 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 Serial 3 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2
This section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance, synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN equipment in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-158
3 Boards
Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics
Performance 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.

Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC Item Dimensions Weight Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 500g (SCCVER.B) 330g (SCCVER.C) 510g (SCCVER.E) Power consumption < 7.0 W
3.17 Fan Tray Assembly

The IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly. 3.17.1 Composition The fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proof environment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter. 3.17.2 Version Description The fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN and SL61FANA. 3.17.3 Functions and Features
3 Boards
The fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling. 3.17.4 Working Principle This section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principle of the fan board in the fan tray assembly. 3.17.5 Front Panel There is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly. 3.17.6 Valid Slots The fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.
3.17.1 Composition
The fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proof environment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter. Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition
Air filter
Panel
Fan board

The fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN and SL61FANA. Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA Item Number of fans Power SL61FAN 6 -48 V SL61FANA 3 +3.3 V
3-160
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3 Boards

The fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling. The fan tray assembly also supports the following functions: l l Detecting faults in the fan and reports alarms. Querying the manufacturing information.

This section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principle of the fan board in the fan tray assembly.

Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board
Backplane Fan unit Control and detection unit +3.3V +12V Power unit +3.3V
SCC
Power Unit
The power unit converts the input +3.3 V power into the +12 V power according to the requirement of the fan unit. The 1+1 power standby protection is also provided for the system. In addition, the power unit provides +3.3 V power for the control and detection unit.
Fan Unit
The fan unit consists of three fans that work at the same time to dissipate heat from the IDU. The fan unit integrates a detection circuit, so that the fan unit can report the fan status and alarms to the control and detection unit.
Control and Detection Unit

Point-to-point communication is performed between the control and detection unit and the SCC. The functions of the control and detection unit are as follows: l l Reports the fan status and alarms to the SCC. Provides the manufacturing information for the SCC.
3.17.5 Front Panel

There is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.
3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-69 FAN front panel
FAN
CLEAN PERIODICALLY
ATTENTION
!
DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVE !
Indicators
Table 3-143 FAN indicator description Indicator FAN Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working normally. The fan is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access.
3.17.6 Valid Slots

The fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.
3 Boards
Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20
EXT EXT EXT SCC
EXT PXC PXC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
3-163
4 Accessories
4
About This Chapter
Accessories
The accessories of the IDU include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). You can select the accessories depending on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. 4.2 PDU The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4-1
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 1-8 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel Interface T1-T16 Description Transmit port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) Receive port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) 9th to 16th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) Connecting a protection ground cable DB37 Type of Connector BNC
R1-R16
1-8 9-16 Grounding bolt
NOTE
The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to Table 4-2.
4-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel) Pin 20 2 22 4 24 6 26 8 36 17 34 15 32 13 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Pin 21 3 23 5 25 7 27 9 35 16 33 14 31 12 Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-)
4-3
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4 Accessories
Pin 30 11 Others
Signal 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Reserved
Pin 29 10 -
Signal 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) -
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. 4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU. 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet. 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode The IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The default power distribution mode is the DC-C mode.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU.
4-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4 Accessories
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 PDU front panel
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT
B
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OUTPUT
ON
OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A
INPUT
OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A
5
1. Output power terminals (A) 3. Input power terminals 5. Power switches (A) 2. PGND 4. Output power terminals (B) 6. Power switches (B)
Interfaces
Table 4-3 PDU interface description Position Output power terminals (A) PGND Interface + (Grounding stud of the twohole OT terminal) RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-) Output power terminals (B) + Description Power output (+) Power output (-) For connecting the protection grounding cable
Input power terminals
The 1st power input (+) The 2nd power input (+) The 1st power input (-) The 2nd power input (-) Power output (+) Power output (-)
4-5
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4 Accessories
Position Power switches (A)
Interface 20 A
Description They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side respectively. They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side respectively.
Power switches (B)
20 A
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l l l l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Each input power supply supports four outputs. The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A. The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.
Working Principle
The PDU primarily consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers (MCBs). The PDU provides the simple power distribution function for the input power. Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle
OUTPUT A
+ SW1 + + SW3 + SW4 1 2
INPUT
RTN1(+) BGND RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
SW2
OUTPUT B
+
BGND
SW1
+ +
1 2
SW2 SW4
PGND
SW4
4-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4 Accessories
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The default power distribution mode is the DC-C mode. The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND. Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
4-7
4 Accessories
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode
4-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
5
About This Chapter
Cables
This section describes the purpose, appearance, and connections of various cables of the IDU. 5.1 Power Cable The power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on the top of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620 system. 5.2 Protection Ground Cable The IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables. 5.3 IF Jumper The IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 V power. 5.4 XPIC Cable The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper Fiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at one end to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the other end of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected. 5.6 E1 Cable The E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables to the E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables. 5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxial cables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/ SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made as required by the site. 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable Auxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data, and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the
5 Cables
ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires, which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37 connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable. Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is used to transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with one DB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated with a connector and is used to transmit synchronous data. 5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable External alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37 connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The other end of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by the site. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs. 5.10 Serial Port Cable Serial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. The cable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCC board, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are also used to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data. 5.11 Orderwire Line The orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11 connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connects the interface of the orderwire phone set. 5.12 Network Cable Network cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45 connectors.
5-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on the top of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620 system.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable
Two cable ties A 1 M020 Main label Label 2
A3 A2 A1
X3 A
X1 100mm L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 3 female
X2 200mm 500mm
2. Single cord end terminal
Cable Connection Table

Table 5-1 Power cable connections Cable Connector X1.A1 X1.A3 Cord End Terminal X2 X3 Connections A1 connects to X2. A3 connects to X3. Color of Core Wire Blue (-48 V power) Black (power ground)
5.2 Protection Ground Cable

The IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables. 5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable
5 Cables
The protection ground cable connects the ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipment share the same ground. 5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel The protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and other equipment share one ground.
5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable

The protection ground cable connects the ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable
Main label 1 Cable Tie H.S.Tube
L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT2 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Table 5-2 IDU protection ground cable connections Equipment Side OT2 Grounding Bar Side OT Connections Color of Wire yellow-green
5-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel

The protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and other equipment share one ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel
Main label 1
L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 V power.
NOTE
No IF jumper is required if the 5D type IF cable is used. The 5D type IF cable is connected to the IF board through a TNC connector. For details about the IF cable, see ODU Hardware Description.
The IF jumper is a 2 m RG223 cable. The IF jumper uses a type-N connector at one end to connect to the IF cable, and a TNC connector at the other end to connect to the IF board.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-5
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper
1 H.S.tube 2Pcs L=3cm 2
2000mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC IN port of one IFX board of an XPIC working group, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC OUT port of the other IFX board of the same XPIC working group. When the XPIC function of an IFX board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the IFX board to loop back signals. The XPIC cable is available in the following two types: l XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the IFX boards in slots 5 and 6 or the IFX boards in slots 7 and 8. XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very short, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the vertical direction, for example, the IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 or the IFX boards in slots 6 and 8. The XPIC cable using straight connectors is also used to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the same IFX board to loop back signals.
5-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
1 1
L1 2 2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

Fiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at one end to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the other end of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.
Types of fiber jumpers

Table 5-3 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Type of Fiber Jumper 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC SC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber
5 Cables
Connector 1 LC/PC
Connector 2 LC/PC
Type of Fiber Jumper 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
FThe Ie-1.1 optical interface and the 1000Base-SX GE optical interface use multi-mode fibers.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors. They are LC/PC connectors, SC/PC connectors, and FC/PC connectors. Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector
Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector
5-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector
5.6 E1 Cable
The E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables to the E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables. The following E1 cables can be delivered together with the equipment: l l l The E1 cables to the external equipment(with DB44 connectors) The E1 cables to the E1 panel (DB44-DB37) The E1 transit cables (MDR68-DB44)
The E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment need to be made on site by terminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors. The description of the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment is not provided in this topic. 5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable When the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the external equipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the external equipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by the site. 5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable When an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1 panel. 5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable An MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses an MDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the other end to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.
5 Cables
5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable

When the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the external equipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the external equipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by the site. The DB44 E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment are categorized into 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables, and one E1 cable transmits eight E1 signals. The 75-ohm coaxial cables are further categorized into 2x8 core cables and 1x16 core cables.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)
A Pos.44 1
Pos.1 A
Main label Label 1 W1 Label 1
Label 2 L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male
W2
Label 2
Label 1: W1 (E1: 1 to 4)
Label 2: W2 (E1: 5 to 8)
5-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)

A Pos.44 1
Pos.1 A
Main label W
L
Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable

A Pos.44 1
Pos.1 A
Main label Label 1 W1 Label 1
Label 2 L
W2
Label 2
Label 1: W1 (TX1 to TX8)
Label 2: W2 (RX1 to RX8)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-11
5 Cables

Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable) Pin Cable W1 Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s Pin Cable W2 Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s
38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
R1
34 19
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid
R5
R2
33 18
R6
R3
32 17
R7
R4
31 16
R8
T1
11 26
T5
T2
10 25
T6
T3
9 24
T7
T4
8 7 Shell
T8
Table 5-5 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable) Pin Cable W Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s Pin Cable W Core Serial Numbe r 9 Remark s
38 23 37
5-12
Ring Tip Ring
R1
34 19
Ring Tip Ring
R5
R2
33
11
R6
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Pin
Cable W Core Serial Numbe r
Remark s
Pin
Cable W Core Serial Numbe r
Remark s
22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 8 T4 6 T3 4 T2 2 T1 7 R4 5 R3
18 32 17 31 16 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell
Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 16 T8 14 T7 12 T6 10 T5 15 R8 13 R7
Table 5-6 120-ohm E1 cable connections Pin Cable W1 Color 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey Pair T5 Pair T4 Pair T3 Pair T2 Relatio n Pair Remark s Pin Cable W2 Color 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey Pair R5 Pair R4 Pair R3 Pair R2 Relatio n Pair Remark s
T1
R1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-13
5 Cables
Pin
Cable W1 Color Relatio n
Remark s
Pin
Cable W2 Color Relatio n
Remark s
26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell
White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Braid Pair T8 Pair T7 Pair T6
19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell
White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Braid Pair R8 Pair R7 Pair R6
5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable

When an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable
Pos.1 A 1 B Pos.1 Pos.37 B 2
Pos.44 A
1500 mm
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male
5-14
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables

Table 5-7 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl Connector X1 X1.38 X1.23 X1.37 X1.22 X1.36 X1.21 X1.35 X1.20 X1.15 X1.30 X1.14 X1.29 X1.13 X1.28 X1.12 X1.27 Shell Connector X2 X2.20 X2.2 X2.22 X2.4 X2.24 X2.6 X2.26 X2.8 X2.21 X2.3 X2.23 X2.5 X2.25 X2.7 X2.27 X2.9 Braid T4 T3 T2 T1 R4 R3 R2 Remarks R1 Connector X1 X1.34 X1.19 X1.33 X1.18 X1.32 X1.17 X1.31 X1.16 X1.11 X1.26 X1.10 X1.25 X1.9 X1.24 X1.8 X1.7 Shell Connector X2 X2.36 X2.17 X2.34 X2.15 X2.32 X2.13 X2.30 X2.11 X2.35 X2.16 X2.33 X2.14 X2.31 X2.12 X2.29 X2.10 Braid T8 T7 T6 T5 R8 R7 R6 Remarks R5
5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable

An MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses an MDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the other end to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel. An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 port or a 120-ohm E1 port.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-15
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable
400 mm Label2 B Pos.68 Main Label W2 A W1 Pos.1 X1 X3 Pos.44
Pos.1
Label1
X2
1. Cable connector, type-MDR, 68 male Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Table 5-8 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections Wire W1 Connecto r X1 X1.35 X1.36 X1.37 X1.38 X1.39 X1.40 X1.41 X1.42 X1.43 X1.44 X1.45 X1.46 X1.47
5-16
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.38 X2.23 X2.15 X2.30 X2.37 X2.22 X2.14 X2.29 X2.36 X2.21 X2.13 X2.28 X2.35
Remarks R1
Connecto r X1 X1.2 X1.1
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.34 X2.19 X2.11 X2.26 X2.33 X2.18 X2.10 X2.25 X2.32 X2.17 X2.9 X2.24 X2.31
Remarks R5
T1
X1.4 X1.3
T5
R2
X1.6 X1.5
R6
T2
X1.8 X1.7
T6
R3
X1.10 X1.9
R7
T3
X1.12 X1.11
T7
R4
X1.14
R8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Wire
Connecto r X1 X1.48 X1.49 X1.50
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.20 X2.12 X2.27 X3.38 X3.23 X3.15 X3.30 X3.37 X3.22 X3.14 X3.29 X3.36 X3.21 X3.13 X3.28 X3.35 X3.20 X3.12 X3.27 Braid
Remarks
Connecto r X1 X1.13
Connecto r X2/X3 X2.16 X2.8 X2.7 X3.34 X3.19 X3.11 X3.26 X3.33 X3.18 X3.10 X3.25 X3.32 X3.17 X3.9 X3.24 X3.31 X3.16 X3.8 X3.7 Braid
Remarks
T4
X1.16 X1.15
T8
W2
X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26 X1.27 X1.28 X1.29 X1.30 X1.31 X1.32 X1.33 X1.34
R9
X1.54 X1.53
R13
T9
X1.56 X1.55
T13
R10
X1.58 X1.57
R14
T10
X1.60 X1.59
T14
R11
X1.62 X1.61
R15
T11
X1.64 X1.63
T15
R12
X1.66 X1.65
R16
T12
X1.68 X1.67 Shell
T16
W1/W2
Shell
5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable

External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxial cables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/ SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made as required by the site.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-17
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable
1 Main Label
L
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMB, female

None.
5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable

Auxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data, and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires, which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37 connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable. Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is used to transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with one DB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated with a connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.
5-18
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable
500mm 300mm W3 Label 7 A Label 4 W1 X2 Label 1 X1 View A 2 Main label
Pos.1 Pos.26
Pos.9
Label 5 Label 6
Label 8
View B W2 X3 Label 3
Pos.1
Label 2
View C
Pos.1
3 W4 C
X4 1000mm
Pos.37
1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 female 2. Cable connector, type-D, 26 male 3. Cable connector, type-D, 37 female Label 1: "OAM" Label 4: "F1" Label 7: "F1-TX-TIP" Label 2: "S1" Label 5: "F1-RX-TIP" Label 8: "F1-TX-RING" Label 3: "ALM" Label 6: "F1-RX-RING"
NOTE
In the preceding figure, "X3" indicates the asynchronous data interface, and "X2" indicates the reserved interface.

Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1) Connector X1 X1.8 X1.16 X1.25 Connector X3 X3.2 X3.3 X3.5 Wire color white white blue Relation Pair Remarks R T GND
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-19
5 Cables
Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2) Connector X1 X1.24 X1.6 Connector X4 X4.1 X4.2 Wire color white blue Relation Pair Remarks Out 2B Out 2A 1st channel (the 2ndchannel output alarm interface) 2nd channel (the 1stchannel output alarm interface) 3rd channel (the 6thchannel input alarm interface) 4th channel (the 5thchannel input alarm interface) 5th channel (the 4thchannel input alarm interface) 6th channel (the 3rdchannel input alarm interface) 7th channel (the 2ndchannel input alarm interface) 8th channel (the 1stchannel input alarm interface)
X1.21 X1.3
X4.3 X4.4
white orange
Pair
Out 1B Out 1A
X1.23 X1.14
X4.5 X4.6
white green
Pair
IN-6-GND IN-6
X1.5 X1.22
X4.7 X4.8
white brown
Pair
IN-5-GND IN-5
X1.13 X1.4
X4.9 X4.10
white gray
Pair
IN-4-GND IN-4
X1.20 X1.11
X4.11 X4.12
red blue
Pair
IN-3-GND IN-3
X1.2 X1.19
X4.13 X4.14
red orange
Pair
IN-2-GND IN-2
X1.10 X1.1
X4.15 X4.16
red green
Pair
IN-1-GND IN-1
5-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Table 5-11 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3) Connector X1 X1.7 Label on Cable W3 F1-RX-TIP Wire color white Relatio n Pair Remarks Synchronous data interface receiving data (+) Synchronous data interface receiving data (-) Pair Synchronous data interface transmitting data (+) Synchronous data interface transmitting data (-)
X1.12
F1-RX-RING
blue
X1.15
F1-TX-TIP
white
X1.17
F1-TX-RING
orange
5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable

External alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37 connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The other end of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by the site. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable
A Pos.1 1 Main label
Pos.37
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-21
5 Cables

NOTE
The cable has five types of signal wires of different colors inside. There are eight blue wires, six grey wires, six pink wires, six green wires, and six orange wires. The signal cables of the same color are differentiated by the red (RED) and black (BLK) dots on the cables. The cable with red dots is the signal cable. The cable with black dots is defined as the ground. One "x" indicates that there is one dot at regular intervals. For example, a blue/redxxx cable refers to a blue signal cable on which there are three dots at regular intervals.
Table 5-12 External alarm transit cable connections Conn ector X1 1 2 Color Relati on Pair Remarks Conn ector X1 17 18 Color Relati on Pair Rema rks 6th chann el
Pink/ Redx Pink/ Black x Orang e/ Redx Orang e/ Black x Blue/ Redx Blue/ Black x Green/ Redx
First channel (the 2ndchannel output alarm interface)
Green/ Redxx Green/ Black xx Grey/ Redxx Grey/ Black xx Pink/ Redxx x Pink/ Black xxx Orang e/ Redxx x Orang e/ Black xxx Blue/ Redxx x Blue/ Black xxx
Pair
Second channel (the 1stchannel output alarm interface)
19
Pair
13th chann el
20
Pair
8th channel (the 6thchannel input alarm interface)
21
Pair
14th chann el
22
Pair
9th channel (the 5thchannel input alarm interface )
23
Pair
12th chann el
Green/ Black x Grey/ Redx Grey/ Black x Pair 3rd channel (the 4thchannel input alarm interface)
24
25
Pair
5th chann el
10
26
5-22
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables
Conn ector X1 11
Color
Relati on Pair
Remarks
Conn ector X1 27
Color
Relati on Pair
Rema rks 11th chann el
Pink/ Redxx Pink/ Black xx Orang e/ Redxx Orang e/ Black xx Blue/ Redxx Blue/ Black xx
10th channel (the 3rdchannel input alarm interface
Green/ Redxx x Green/ Black xxx Grey/ Redxx x Grey/ Black xxx Blue/ Redxx xx Blue/ Black xxxx
12
28
13
Pair
4th channel (the 2ndchannel input alarm interface
29
Pair
15th chann el
14
30
15
Pair
7th channel (the 1stchannel input alarm interface)
31
Pair
16th chann el
16
32
5.10 Serial Port Cable

Serial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. The cable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCC board, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are also used to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-23
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable
A Pos.9 1 Main lable
Pos.1
X1 L
X2

Table 5-13 Serial port cable connections Connector X1 X1.3 X1.2 X1.5 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.3 X2.5 Relation Pair
5.11 Orderwire Line

The orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11 connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connects the interface of the orderwire phone set.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire
1
6
Main Label
6
X1
1. Orderwire wire, RJ-11 connector
X2
5-24
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables

Table 5-14 Orderwire wire connections Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 Core Tip Ring
5.12 Network Cable

Network cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45 connectors. RJ-45 connectors have two types of interfaces. The first type is the medium dependent interface (MDI) used by terminal equipment such as network card. Refer to Table 5-15. The second type is the MDI-X used by network equipment. Refer to Table 5-16. Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-25
5 Cables
Table 5-16 Pin assignments of the MDI-X Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the two network cables are the connections. The ETH and ETH-HUB ports on the SCC board, the four FE ports on the EFT4 board and the GE/FE electrical ports on the EMS6 board support MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing. Thus, both straight through cables and crossover cables can be used between these ports and the MDI/MDIX interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable
1 Label 1 Main Label Label 2 8 1
8 1
1. Network interface connector, RJ-45
5-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5 Cables

Table 5-17 Cable connection of the straight through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color White/Orange Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Pair Pair Pair Relation Pair
Table 5-18 Cable connection of the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Pair Pair Pair Relation Pair
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
5-27
A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards
A
Indicators of Boards
Indicator STAT
Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards
Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms.
A-1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Indicator
Status On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms
Meaning The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
BER
On (yellow) Off
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
Table A-2 IFX indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-2
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The services are not configured. The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
XPIC
On (green) On (red) Off
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
Off
Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) Meaning The board is working normally.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-3
Indicator
Status On (red) Off
Meaning The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access.
SRV
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
LINK
On (green) On (red)
ODU
On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms
BER
On (yellow) Off
RMT
On (yellow) Off
ACT
On (green)
A-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).
Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow) Off RMT On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms. The ODU has minor alarms. The ODU is offline, or has no power access. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-5
Indicator ACT
Status On (green)
Meaning The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).
Off
Table A-5 SL4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The optical interface of the SL4 reports the R_LOS alarm. The optical interface of the SL4 has no R_LOS alarm.
SRV
LOS
On (red)
Off
Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
A-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access.
SRV
The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 has no R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 has no R_LOS alarm.
LOS1
On (red)
Off
LOS2
On (red)
Off
Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-7
Indicator
Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table A-8 PL3 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
SRV
Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
A-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Indicator
Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software.
PROG
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-9
Indicator
Status 300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off
Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost.
On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off
On (red)
Off SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Green indicator (LINK1) On Off Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing Off
The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The link at the GE1 port is normal. The link at the GE1 port fails. The GE1 port is transmitting or receiving data. The GE1 port is not transmitting or receiving data. The link at the GE2 port is normal. The link at the GE2 port fails. The GE2 port is transmitting or receiving data.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Green indicator (LINK2)
On Off
Yellow indicator (ACTIV2)
On or flashing
A-10
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The GE2 port is not transmitting or receiving data.
Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6 Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is running, the software is running normally. 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. SRV On (green) The services are normal.
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-11
Indicator
Status On (red) On (yellow) Off
Meaning A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.
Table A-13 PXC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. PWR On (green) On (red) The power supply is working normally. The +3.3 V power supply is faulty, or the input -48 V power supply is abnormal. There is no power access. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection). Off The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).
Off SYNC On (green) On (red) ACT On (green)
A-12
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Table A-14 SCC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l The board has no power access. PROG On: 100 ms (green) Off: 100 ms When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initiated. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory selfcheck fails or loading upper layer software fails. l When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. l The pluggable storage card is faulty. Off ALM On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The software is running normally. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system.
On: 300 ms (green) Off: 300 ms
On (green) On: 100 ms (red) Off: 100 ms
On (red)
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-13
Indicator
Status Off
Meaning The system has no power access. The system is in the maintenance state. The maintenance state includes loopback, laser shutdown, and ODU transmitting in silence. The system is in the working state.
MANT
On (yellow)
Off
Table A-15 FAN indicator description Indicator FAN Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working normally. The fan is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access.
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table A-16 Weight of Boards Board IF1A IF1B IFX IF0A IF0B IFH2 SL4 SL1 SD1 SLE Weight 420 g 400 g 450 g 520 g 520 g 580 g 290 g 290 g 300 g 300 g Power Consumption < 12.2 W < 12.2 W < 14.5 W < 13.7 W < 13.7 W < 16.4 W < 7.2 W <3W < 3.9 W < 4.2 W
A-14
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
Board SDE PL3 PO1 PH1 PD1 EFT4 EMS6 EFP6 PXC SCC
Weight 330 g 310 g 280 g 310 g 380 g 306 g 400 g 400 g 540 g 500g (SCCVER.B) 330g (SCCVER.C) 510g (SCCVER.E)
Power Consumption < 4.9 W < 5.1 W <2W < 2.8 W < 5.8 W < 7.5 W < 12.3 W < 11.6 W < 7.5 W < 7.0 W
FAN
350 g
< 9.7W
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
A-15
B Glossary
B
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. B.1 0-9 B.2 A-E B.3 F-J B.4 K-O B.5 P-T B.6 U-Z
Glossary
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-1
B Glossary
B.1 0-9
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic signal to be provided. The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.) 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLAN tags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQ feature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.
1U 802.1Q in 802.1Q
B.2 A-E
A
ABR ACAP Access Control List See Available Bit Rate See adjacent channel alternate polarization Access Control List (ACL) is a list of IP address. The addresses listed in the ACL are used for authentication. If the ACL for the user is not null, it indicates that the address where the user logged in is contained in the list. See Access Control List A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. See Analog to Digital Converter Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment through its IP address.
ACL adaptive modulation
ADC add/drop multiplexer
Address Resolution Protocol
B-2
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
adjacent channel alternate polarization ADM Administrative Unit
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals. See add/drop multiplexer The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. See Assured Forwarding See Automatic Gain Control A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects. See Alarm Indication Signal When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE. A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Note: See ITU-T Rec. G.707/Y.1322 for specific AIS signals. A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. See adaptive modulation An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC). See Automatic Protection Switching See Address Resolution Protocol amplitude shift keying Assured Forwarding (AF) is one of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. AF is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channel demand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of network resources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit
AF AGC aggregation AIS Alarm automatic report alarm cascading Alarm Filtering
Alarm Indication Signal Alarm suppression
AM Analog to Digital Converter APS ARP ASK Assured Forwarding
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM ATM PVC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-3
B Glossary
ATPC attenuator AU Automatic Gain Control Automatic Protection Switching automatic transmit power control Available Bit Rate
See automatic transmit power control A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fibre Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. See Administrative Unit A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the traffic. A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
B
Backward Defect Indication bandwidth When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI) to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Power control, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. Base Transceiver Station BDI BE BER best effort A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio equipment, and the antenna. See Backward Defect Indication See best effort See Bit Error Rate A kind of PHB (Per-Hop-Behavior). In the forwarding process of a DS domain, the traffic of this PHB type features reachability but the DS node does not guarantee the forwarding quality. Basic Input Output System Bit-Interleaved Parity An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the communications quality of a network.
BIOS BIP bit error Bit Error Rate
B-4
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
blank filler panel BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep proper airflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance. See Bridge Protocol Data Unit The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. See Base Station Controller See Base Transceiver Station A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices.
Broadcast BSC BTS Buffer
C
C-VLAN cable ladder Customer VLAN (1) A cable ladder is a frame which supports electrical cables. (2) Two metal cables usually made of stainless steel with rungs of lightweight metal tubing such as aluminum, six or eight inches wide spaced about eighteen inches apart. It can be rolled into a compact lightweight bundle for transport ease. The tape used to bind the cables. The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet. Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses but are more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to the firewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing. See committed access rate See Constant Bit Rate See Circuit Cross Connect See Co-Channel Dual Polarization See continuity check message See Customer Edge The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processor or central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place. See Circuit Emulation Service See compact flash Cisco Group Management Protocol Cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.
cable tie cabling trough captive nut
CAR CBR CCC CCDP CCM CE Central Processing Unit CES CF CGMP
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-5
B Glossary
CIR Circuit Cross Connect Circuit Emulation Service
See Committed Information Rate An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end. See Common and Internal Spanning Tree A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network. A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs, the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from high to low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the services of low priority. The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors. Two or multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are combined to serve as one BTS. A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface. CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate can be defined. The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to the leaky bucket.
CIST CIST root Class of Service
Clock tracing Co-Channel Dual Polarization Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing Colored packet Combined cabinet committed access rate
Committed Information Rate
Common and Internal Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP and Spanning Tree RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridges and regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local Area Network are simply and fully connected. compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in a standardized enclosure. A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence. A plate that connects two adjacent cabinet together at the cabinet top for fixing.
Concatenation connecting plate for combining cabinets
B-6
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Connectivity Check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. This detection is called CC detection. constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed using CSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortest path algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. A constraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidth guaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPF is widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known as Constraint Based Routing (CBR). An alternative to RSVP (Resource ReSerVation Protocol) in MPLS (MultiProtocol Label Switching) networks. RSVP, which works at the IP (Internet Protocol) level, uses IP or UDP datagrams to communicate between LSR (Label Switched Routing) peers. RSVP does not require the maintenance of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) sessions, although RSVP must assume responsibility for error control. CR-LDP is designed to facilitate the routing of LSPs (Label Switched Paths) through TCP sessions between LSR peers through the communication of label distribution messages during the session. CCM is used to detect the link status. A pipe which is used for fiber routing. See Class of Service See Central Processing Unit See Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol See Cyclic Redundancy Check A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP. See Constraint Shortest Path First A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. See Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Constant Bit Rate
Constraint Shortest Path First
Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol
continuity check message corrugated tube CoS CPU CR-LDP CRC cross polarization interference cancellation CSPF Customer Edge CWDM Cyclic Redundancy Check
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-7
B Glossary
D
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Data Communication Network Also Data Communications Equipment (DCE) and Data Carrier Equipment (DCE). The basic function of a DCE is to convert data from one interface, such as a digital signal, to another interface, such as an analog signal. One example of DCE is a modem. A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data Communication Function (DCF).
Data Communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to Channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. Datagram DC DC-C DC-I DC-Return Common (with Ground) DC-Return Isolate (with Ground) DCC DCE DCN DDF DDN DE Detour LSP diamond-shaped nut A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. See Direct Current See DC-Return Common (with Ground) See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground) A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. See Data Communications Channel See Data Circuit-terminal Equipment See Data Communication Network See Digital Distribution Frame See Digital Data Network See discard eligible The LSP that is used to re-route traffic around a failure in one-to-one backup. A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.
Differentiated Services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing. Differentiated Services Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits Code Point 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB according to the DSCP value. DiffServ Digital Data Network See Differentiated Services A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
B-8
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Digital Distribution Frame digital modulation
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection, cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction. A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors. A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a domain that is not DS-capable. In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain. A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. See Differentiated Services Code Point
Direct Current discard eligible
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DS boundary node DS domain
DS interior node DS node DSCP
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-AGGR E-LAN E-Tree EBS ECC EF EFM Electro Magnetic Interference Ethernet-Aggregation See Ethernet LAN See Ethernet-Tree See Excess Burst Size See Embedded Control Channel See Expedited Forwarding See Ethernet in the First mile Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-9
B Glossary
electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. [NTIA]
ElectroStatic Discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field. Embedded Control Channel EMC EMI Engineering label EPLn equalization ERPS ES-IS ESD ESD jack ETH-CC ETH-LB ETH-LT Ethernet An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. See electromagnetic compatibility See Electro Magnetic Interference A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. See Ethernet Private LAN A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. See ethernet ring protection switching End System to Intermediate System See ElectroStatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap. Ethernet Continuity Check Ethernet Loopback Ethernet Link Trace A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/ s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.. Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the advantages of the SHDSL.bis technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV) and Video On Demand (VOD). Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in different domains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves as a Layer 2 switch. Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies. A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. etherenet tree. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual Connection.
Ethernet in the First mile
Ethernet LAN
Ethernet Private LAN ethernet ring protection switching Ethernet Virtual Private LAN Ethernet-Tree
B-10
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
ETS ETSI ETSI 300mm cabinet European Telecommunications Standards Institute EVPL EVPLn Excess Burst Size
European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards of the ETSI. A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Ethernet Virtual Private Line See Ethernet Virtual Private LAN excess burst size. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is realized by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The protection switching is not really performed.
Exercise Switching
Expedited Forwarding Expedited Forwarding (EF) is the highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
B.3 F-J
F
Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been detected. A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies with the IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard. The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation. Frame Check Sequence See frequency diversity See Forward Defect Indication See Fast Ethernet See Forward Error Correction Fast Failure Detection A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source (or a detector).
Fast Ethernet fast link pulse FCS FD FDI FE FEC FFD Fiber Connector
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-11
B Glossary
fiber patch cord Field Programmable Gate Array
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a subrack. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arraies. See First in First out A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an FTP client and the other an FTP server. A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked. See fast link pulse This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protection channel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards are satisfying a higher priority bridge request. Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers. A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network. See Field Programmable Gate Array Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units. Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that can not support the original size of the packet. A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle. A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words, a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. See File Transfer Protocol The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.On the communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.
FIFO File Transfer Protocol
First in First out FLP Forced switch
Forward Defect Indication
Forward Error Correction Forwarding plane FPGA Fragment Fragmentation frame
frequency diversity
FTP Full duplex
B-12
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
G
gateway network element GCP GE A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer See GMPLS control plan See Gigabit Ethernet
Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. GFP Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users . The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. See gateway network element See Global Positioning System See Graceful Restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/ MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-Intermediate System (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP), and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwarding is not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocols at the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This series of standards is called Graceful Restart. A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen. (electricity) Opposition of the earth to the flow of current through it; its value depends on the nature and moisture content of the soil, on the material, composition, and nature of connections to the earth, and on the electrolytic action present. See Generic traffic shaping See Graphical User Interface Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
Global Positioning System GMPLS control plan
GNE GPS GR Graceful Restart
Graphical User Interface ground resistance
GTS GUI guide rail
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-13
B Glossary
H
H-QoS HA half-duplex Hierarchical Quality of Service See High Availability A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before replying. High Density Bipolar Code 3 See High level Data Link Control procedure The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, which may exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtain the high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning cases one by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the system that requires an HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach. A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links. Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocols including X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLC have been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP). A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels. A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another. A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire system. Higher Order Path See High Speed Downlink Packet Access Hitless Switch Mode High Tributary Bus The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.
HDB3 HDLC High Availability
High level Data Link Control procedure
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
Hold priority
Hop hot standby
HP HSDPA HSM HTB hybrid radio
I
ICMP IDU
B-14
See Internet Control Messages Protocol See indoor unit

B Glossary
IEC IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping
See International Electrotechnical Commission See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers The Internet Engineering Task Force See intermediate frequency See Internet Group Management Protocol A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services. A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect unit. A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. The area for the interface boards on the subrack.
IMA indoor unit Inloop Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Interface board area
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol Intermediate System (IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm to calculate the route. Internal Spanning Tree Internal spanning tree. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0. International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization Internet Control Messages Protocol Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards. ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer and publisher of International Standards. ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messages during the transmission of IP-type data packets. The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-15
B Glossary
Internet Protocol Version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. See Internet Protocol See Internet Protocol Version 6 See Intermediate System to Intermediate System See International Organization for Standardization See Internal Spanning Tree International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector Independence VLAN learning
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IP IPv6 IS-IS ISO IST ITU-T IVL
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
B.4 K-O
L
L2VPN Label Switched Path See Layer 2 virtual private network A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
Label Switching Router The Label Switching Router (LSR) is the basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. LACP LAG LAN LAPD LAPS See Link Aggregation Control Protocol See link aggregation group See Local Area Network Link Access Procedure on the D channel Link Access Procedure-SDH
B-16
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
layer 2 switch
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network realized in the packet switched (IP/MPLS) network by Layer network 2 switching technologies. LB LCAS LDPC line rate forwarding Link Aggregation Control Protocol See Loopback See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Low-Density Parity Check code The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad) that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACP allows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Link Protection The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. Linear Multiplex Section Protection A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. See Loss Of Frame Loss Of Multiframe A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. See Loss Of Pointer See Loss Of Signal A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
LMSP Local Area Network
Locked switching
LOF LOM Loopback LOP LOS Loss Of Frame
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-17
B Glossary
Loss Of Pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer. Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received signal. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. Lower Order Path Link State Path Through See Label Switched Path See Label Switching Router
Loss Of Signal Lower subrack LP LPT LSP LSR
M
MA MAC MAC MADM Maintenance Association Maintenance association End Point See Maintenance Association See Medium Access Control See Media Access Control Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance Entities. A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association. The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP. Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP. A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as routers and switches) in a network. A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to the protection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability. The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can be sent over a network. Maximum Burst Size See Message Communication Function See Maintenance Domain See Medium Dependent Interface The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Maintenance Domain Maintenance Point Management Information Base Manual switching
Maximum Transfer Unit MBS MCF MD MDI Mean Time To Repair
B-18
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Media Access Control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particular network. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses. The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media transmission. See Maintenance association End Point The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management information with their prs . See Management Information Base Maintenance Intermediate Point See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol An L-shape steel sheet. One side is fixed on the front panel with screws, and the other side is fixed on the installation hole with screws. On both sides of a rack, there is an Lshaped metal fastener. This ensures that internal components are closely connected with the rack. Normally, an internal component is installed with two mount angles. See Maintenance Point Maintenance Point Identification See Multi-Protocol Label Switch The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network.In this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP. The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs. In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum. Multiprotocol Label Switching Traffic Engineering In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or FILTER_SPEC object. See Multiplex Section See multiplex section protection
Medium Access Control Medium Dependent Interface MEP Message Communication Function MIB MIP MLPPP mount angle
MP MPID MPLS MPLS L2VPN
MPLS OAM
MPLS TE MPLS TE tunnel
MS MSP
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-19
B Glossary
MSTI MSTP MTBF MTTR MTU Multi-link Point to Point Protocol Multi-Protocol Label Switch
See Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Mean Time Between Failure See Mean Time To Repair See Maximum Transfer Unit A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line, doubling connection rates to 128Kbps. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST region are as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation between the VLAN ID to MSTI The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions. A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
Multicast
Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple Spanning Tree Region
Multiplex Section multiplex section protection
N
N+1 protection NE NE Explorer A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. See Network Element The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiX equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
B-20
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Network Element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board. The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
network management system
Network Service Access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can Point access OSI network services. Network to Network Interface next hop NLP NMS NNHOP NNI Node This is an internal interface within a network linking two or more elements. The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network on its journey to its final destination. Normal Link Pulse See network management system Next-Next-Hop See Network to Network Interface A node stands for a managed device in the network.For a device with a single frame, one node stands for one device.For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for one frame of the device.Therefore, a node does not always mean a device. A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the PLR. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer. See non-gateway network element See Network Service Access Point Not Stop Forwarding Network Serial Multiplexed Interface
Node Protection
non-gateway network element non-GNE NSAP NSF NSMI
O
OAM ODF ODU One-to-One Backup Open Shortest Path First See Operation, Administration and Maintenanc See Optical Distribution Frame See outdoor unit A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected tunnel at a PLR. A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-21
B Glossary
Open Systems Interconnection
A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization of Standards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a telecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions that take place at each end of a communication. Operation, Administration and Maintenance. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. See Open Systems Interconnection OptiX Software Platform See Open Shortest Path First The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals. A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without changing the structure of the signals. The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
Operation, Administration and Maintenanc
Optical Distribution Frame orderwire OSI OSP OSPF outdoor unit Outloop Output optical power
B.5 P-T
P
Packet over SDH/ SONET packet switched network Packing case Path/Channel A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode. A case which is used for packing the board or subrack. A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signal at the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for the signal is disassembled. See peak burst size See Printed Circuit Board PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems. See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protocol Data Unit See Provider Edge
PBS PCB PCI bus PDH PDU PE

B-22
B Glossary
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed information rate. Penultimate Hop Popping Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an adjacent Label Edge Router (LER). A forwarding behavior applied at a DS-compliant node. This behavior belongs to the behavior aggregate defined in the DiffServ domain. See Per-Hop-Behavior See Penultimate Hop Popping Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode See Peak Information Rate
Per-Hop-Behavior PHB PHP PIM-DM PIM-SM PIR
Plesiochronous Digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum Hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack. polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. See Packet over SDH/SONET A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. See Point-to-Point Protocol Provider Provisioned VPN See Priority Queuing Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence Primary Reference Clock A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
POS Power box PPP PPVPN PQ PRBS PRC Printed Circuit Board
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-23
B Glossary
Priority Queuing
A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it An area for the processing boards on the subrack. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Processing board area protection grounding cable Protection path
Protocol Independent A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and interMulticast-Sparse Mode domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is not dependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparsemode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (and their routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicast routing protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere and then pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructs a tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets from the sender then follow this tree. Provider Edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE. An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW. Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge to Edge (PWE3) is a type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. See packet switched network Packet Transport Network See Pseudo wire See Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge
Pseudo wire
Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-toEdge
PSN PTN PW PWE3
Q
QoS QPSK See Quality of Service See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmission Keying through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
B-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Quality of Service
Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability, service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
R
Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources. A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented. An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. See Remote Defect Indication The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER. See Random Early Detection See Remote Error Indication A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal detects specific defects in the incoming signal. A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte. A manage information base (MIB) defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). RMON is mainly used to monitor the data flow of one network segment or the entire network. The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end to slow down the transmission rate. See Radio Freqency Request For Comment
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-25
Radio Network Controller Random Early Detection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RDI Received Signal Strength Indicator Receiver Sensitivity RED REI Remote Defect Indication Remote Error Indication
remote network monitoring Resource Reservation Protocol
Reverse pressure
RF RFC
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
RIP RMON RNC Root alarm route Routing Information Protocol
See Routing Information Protocol See remote network monitoring See Radio Network Controller An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/ IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination. Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available. Reed-Solomon encoding Received Signal Level See Received Signal Strength Indicator See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See Resource Reservation Protocol Radio Transmission Node
routing table
RS RSL RSSI RSTP RSVP RTN
S
SD SDH SDP SEMF Service Level Agreement See space diversity See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Serious Disturbance Period Synchronous Equipment Management Function A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the documented target measure. Severely Errored Second The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the resources required by other backup tunnels. See Signal Fail See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SES Setup Priority
SF SFP
B-26
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
side trough signal cable Signal Fail Signal Noise Ratio
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the cabinet. Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signal cable. SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active. The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block. Of or relating to a telecommunications system in which only one message can be sent in either direction at one time. See Service Level Agreement To divide data into the information units proper for transmission. A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. See SubNetwork Connection See SubNetwork Connection Protection See Simple Network Management Protocol See Signal Noise Ratio Strict Priority A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Simple Network Management Protocol
simplex SLA Slicing Small Form-Factor Pluggable SNC SNCP SNMP SNR SP space diversity
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network. SSM Static Virtual Circuit See Synchronization Status Message Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM. STM STM-1 See synchronous transport module SDH Transport Module -1
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-27
B Glossary
STM-1e STM-1o STP sub-network
STM-1 Electrical Interface STM-1 Optical Interface See Spanning Tree Protocol Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipments under their management. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router and is matched with the IP address. A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnet mask
SubNetwork Connection
SubNetwork A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if Connection Protection the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. SVC SVL Switch See Static Virtual Circuit Shared VLAN Learning To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
Synchronization Status A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous Message timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold), and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous transport An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields module organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
B-28
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length, packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced, thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. Tag Control Information See TransmissionControl Protocol See Time Division Multiplexing See traffic engineering See Traffic Engineering DataBase
Tail drop
TCI TCP TDM TE TEDB
Telecommunication The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T Management Network for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. TIM Time Division Multiplexing Trace Identifier Mismatch It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3......), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. See Telecommunication Management Network A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header. See Tributary Protection Switch A task that effectively maps the service flows to the existing physical topology. TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS TE network. It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Time To Live
TMN ToS priority TPS traffic engineering Traffic Engineering DataBase
Traffic shaping
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-29
B Glossary
trail
A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signals. The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. See Two Rate Three Color Marker See Time To Live Tributary Unit A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
TransmissionControl Protocol
Tributary Protection Switch trTCM TTL TU Tunnel
Two Rate Three Color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn't exceed the CIR.
B.6 U-Z
U
UAS UBR UDP underfloor cabling UNI Unicast Unspecified Bit Rate Unavailable Second See Unspecified Bit Rate See User Datagram Protocol The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor. See User Network Interface The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded, and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender. The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks. Uninterruptible Power Supply Cables or fibres connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
Upper subrack UPS upward cabling
B-30
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
User Datagram Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is, the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is received.
User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the interface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a private network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.
V
V-NNI V-UNI Variable Bit Rate See virtual network-network interface See Virtual User-Network Interface One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. See Variable Bit Rate See Virtual Channel Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Channel Connection See Virtual Chanel Connection See virtual concatenation group See Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual Channel Connection. The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection. Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in the ATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the sw virtual channel identifier. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparently transporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.
VBR VC VC-12 VC-3 VC-4 VCC VCC,VPL VCG VCI Virtual Chanel Connection Virtual Channel
Virtual Channel Identifier virtual concatenation group Virtual Leased Line
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-31
B Glossary
Virtual Local Area Network virtual networknetwork interface
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated with switched Ethernet. A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.
Virtual Path Identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs. Virtual Private LAN Service Virtual Private Network Virtual Private Wire Service Virtual Routing and Forwarding A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN. The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet. A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR, Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN. A technology included in IP (Internet Protocol) network routers that allows multiple instances of a routing table to exist in a router and work simultaneously.
Virtual Switch Instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge function and can terminate PW. Virtual User-Network Interface VLAN VLL Voice over IP virtual user-network interface. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service claissification and traffic control in HQoS. See Virtual Local Area Network See Virtual Leased Line An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). See Voice over IP See Virtual Path Identifier See Virtual Private LAN Service See Virtual Private Network See Virtual Private Wire Service See Virtual Routing and Forwarding See Virtual Switch Instance
VoIP VPI VPLS VPN VPWS VRF VSI
W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from. See Wide Area Network
WAN
B-32
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B Glossary
Web LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network
Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) is a fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled. Weighted Random Early Detection WFQ Wide Area Network A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. See Weighted Fair Queuing A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe. Wire speed refers to the maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of wire speed equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. Wholesale Managed Services See Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted Round Robin See Wait to Restore Time
Winding pipe wire speed WMS WRED WRR WTR
X
XPD XPIC Cross-Polarization Discrimination See cross polarization interference cancellation
Issue 04 (2010-10-30)
B-33

RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description (V100R005C00 - 04)

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description (V100R005C00 - 04)

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Updates in Issue 04 (2010-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1 B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

Introduction to the Product

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

FE STM-1/ E1 STM-1/ E1 Regional Backhaul Network BSC

OptiX RTN 620

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

E1 E1 STM-1/E1 E1 Regional Backhaul Network FE/GE GE

OptiX RTN 620

OptiX RTN 620

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

Figure 1-4 IDU 620

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Microwave modulation mode

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.